Skip to main content

Full text of "ibm :: 370 :: OS VS1 :: GC24-5094-1 OS VS1 Storage Estimates Jan73"

See other formats


GC24-5094-1 
File No. S370-34 



Systems 



OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



VS1 Release 2 



irpc: 

3L 




Page of GC24-5094-1, revised by TNL GN24-5463, February 1 , 1973 



S econd Edition (January 1973) 

This edition applies to Release 2 of 0S/VS1 and to all 
subsequent releases until otherwise indicated in new editions 
or Technical Newsletters. Changes are continually made to 
the information contained herein; before using this 
publication in connection with the operation of IBM systems, 
consult the IBM System /360 an d System/370 Bibliography , 
GA22-6 822, and the IBM System/370 Advanced Function 
Bibliography / GC20-1763, for the editions that are applicable 
and current. 

Information on the Dynamic Support System (DSS) is included 
for planning purposes only until it is available. Consult 
your IBM Branch Office concerning the availability dates. 

Level II of TCAM will not run under Release 2 of VS1. The 
TCAM information in this book is included for planning 
purposes until the availability of TCAM. Level IV. 

S ummary of Amendments 

For a list of changes made in this edition, see page 3. 

Changes; eft additions to the text and illustrations are 
"indicated by a vertical line to the left of the change. 

Requests for copies of IBM publications should be made to 
your .IBM representative or to the IBM branch office serving 
your^ locality. 

A form for reader' s comments is provided at the back of this 
publication. If the form has been removed, comments may be 
addressed to IBM Programming Publications, Dept. G60, 
P.O. Box ;6, -Endicott, New York 13760. Comments become the 
prope-'ty ' f IBM. 

'■■... ;;v 

(c) Copyriy^t international Business Machines Corporation 1972, 1973 



Summary of Amendments 

forGC24-5094-l 

OS/VS 1 Release 2 



NEE FUNCTIO NS 

This edition documents supports for these 
new functions: 

• Remote entry Services (RES) 

• RTAM 

• I/O Load Balancing 

PROGRAM ENHANCEMENTS 

This edition documents the following 
program enhancements: 



DEB Validity Checking 
Revised BLDL and RAM lists 
Dynamic Dispatching 
Automated IPL 



FOR PLANNING PURPO SES ONLY 

This edition documents the following 
programs for planning purposes: 

• Dynamic System Support (DSS) 

• TCAM Level II (will not operate under 
Release 2 until the availability of TCAM 
Level IV) . 



H 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Preface 



This publication should enable users to 
estimate the virtual, real, and auxiliary 
storage requirements for any machine 
configuration, control program, and control 
program option of 0S/VS1 . 

This publication is organized into 5 
sections and Appendixes A and B. 

Section 1 Introduction 

Section 2 Estimating Virtual storage 
Size 

Section 3 Estimating Total Real Storage 

Section 4 Access Method Storage 

Section 5 Estimating the Auxiliary 
Storage Requirement 

Appendix A Type 3 and 4 SVC Routines 

Appsniix B Access Method Modules 

Section 1 describes virtual, real, and 
auxiliary storage and their 
characteristics . 

Section 2 describes requirements for 
pageable control program virtual storage 
and pageable Job Entry Subsystem storage. 

Section 3 describes the resident nucleus 
storage requirement, system queue area 
(SQA) storage, and options for the 
CTRLPBOG, DATAMGT, GRAPHICS, SVC TABLE, and 
SCHEDULR macros. This section also 
includes the Input/output supervisor 
storage and the real storage necessary 
during system generation. 

Section 4 describes the access methods 
required to process data sets. 

Section 5 describes the auxiliary 
storage for the various system resident 



devices and the work space necessary for 
IBM- supplied control and processing 
programs. 



Appendix A lists the storage sizes of 
Type 3 and 4 SVC Routines and Error 
Recovery Procedures. 



Appendix B lists the storage sizes of 
all Access Method Modules for VS1. 



HOW TO USE THIS PUBLICATION 



These notation conventions are used in this 
publication: 

1. A subscript after a column heading or a 
table entry indicates the number of a 
note found at the bottom of the page. 
For example, table entry 132 (2) refers 
the reader to note 2 for more 
information on entry 132. 

2. Standard mathematical conventions 
regarding notation apply to all 
formulas in this book. For example, 
braces, brackets, and parentheses (when 
used in a formula) indicate the order 
in which the calculation is to be 
performed. That is, a quantity 
contained within parentheses should be 
calculated first and the result used to 
calculate a quantity within brackets. 
Braces are used to express a third 
level of nesting, if necessary. 

Other publications that are referenced in 
this publication are: 

IBM S yst em/370, System Summary, GA22-7001. 

0S/V S1 Planning an d Use Guide , GC24-5090. 



Preface 



6 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Contents 



INTRODUCTION 1 

Storage Areas 1 

Virtual Storage 1 

Real Storage 1 

Auxiliary Storage 1 

Recovery Management Storage 1 

Storage Characteristics 13 

Nonpageable Storage 13 

Pageable Storage 13 



ESTIMATING VIRTUAL STORAGE SIZE .... 14 

Pageable Supervisor 14 

Pageable Job Entry Subsystem (JES) ... 14 

User Options 14 

Estimating Pageable Virtual storage . . 15 

RTAM Program Virtual Storage 17 

Pageable Storage for 2250s 18 

Example: For Estimating Pageable 

Control Program Virtual Storage .... 20 

Virtual Storage Space Available to all 

Partitions 21 

How to Estimate the Size of a 

Partition in Virtual Storage 21 

Supervisor Storage Requirements .... 22 

Overlay Supervisor 23 

Loader * 24 

ESTIMATING TOTAL REAL STORAGE ..... 36 

Input/Output Supervisor Requirements . . 37 

Eixed RTAM Real Storage 41 

Supervisor Nucleus 42 

Example: For Estimating Fixed Real 

Storage Requirement 44 

Estimating Fixed System Queue Area 

(SQA) Requirements 46 

Example: For Estimating The Fixed SQA 

Requirement 48 

Estimating Fixed PQA 48 

Processing Program Fixed Storage 

Requirement 49 

Calculating Available V=R Space for 

Jobs Run V=R 49 

Real Storage Requirement During System 

Initialization 50 

Conversational Remote Job Entry (CRJE) 

Partition Requirement 50 

ACCESS METHOD STORAGE . 53 

Basic Indexed Sequential Access Method 

(BISAM) 53 

Without WRITE KN 53 

With WRITE KN 55 

BISAM Example 57 

Graphic Access Method (GAM) 58 

2250 Example 59 

2260 Example 59 

Queued Indexed Sequential Access 

Method (QISAM) ..... 60 

Buffer-Area Requirement 60 



Data/Set Creation 61 

Data Set Scanning 62 

QISAM Example 63 

Basic Telecommunications Access Method 

(BTAM) 64 

BTAM Example 69 

Sequential Access Methods (BSAM and 

QSAM) 70 

BSAM Example 85 

QSAM Example 85 

Basic Direct Access Method (BDAM) ... 86 

BDAM Example 89 

Basic Partitioned Access Method (BPAM) . 90 

BPAM Example 90 

Telecommunications Access Method (TCAM) 91 

Message Control Program 91 

TCAM Application Programs 102 

I Fixed Real Storage Requirements . . . .104 

TCAM Example 105 

Checkpoint/Restart Work Area 

Requirement 109 

ESTIMATING THE AOXILIARY-STORAGE 

REQUIREMENT 110 

System Residence 110 

System Catalog (SYSCTLG) 113 

RTAM Message Data Set (SYS1 . BRODCAST) .114 

Nucleus Library (SYS1. NUCLEUS) 115 

SVC Library (SYS1 . SVCLIB) 116 

Machine/Error/Recording Data Set 

(SYS1.L0GREC) .117 

SYS1.SAMPLIB 117 

Page Data Set (SYS1.PAGE) 118 

Link Library * (SYS1 .LINKLIB) 119 

System Job Queue (SYS1 . SYSJOBQE) . . . .120 
System SPOOL Data Set (SYS1. SYSPOOL) . .122 

SY S1 . SYSPOOL Space/Reguirement 

Example 123 

Formula for Spool Cylinder Map size .123 
Scheduler Work Area Data Set (SWADS) . .125 
Procedure Library (SYS 1. PROCLIB) . . . .126 
Parameter Library (SYS1 . PARMLIB) . . . .127 

Image Library (SYS1 .IMAGELIB) 128 

Macro Library (SYS1 . MACLIB) 128 

Subroutine Libraries 129 

SMF Data Set (SYS1.MAN) 129 

Core Image Dump Data Set (SYS1.DUMP) . .129 
Data Set for Checkpoint/Restart . . . .130 
TCAM Message Queues Data Set 131 

The TCAM Checkpoint Data Set . . . . .132 
Work-Space Requirements 133 

APPENDIX A 134 

Type 3 and 4 SVC Routines 134 

Error Recovery Procedures 155 

APPENDIX B .159 

Access Method Modules 159 

INDEX 173 



Contents 



8 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Figures 



Figure 1. Virtual Storage 

Organization for the VS 1 system. ... 13 

Figure 2. Optimum number of JES 

buffers required 15 

Figure 3. Pageable JES storage 

reguirements 16 

Figure 4. Program virtual RTAM 

storage reguirements 17 

Figure 5. Pageable storage required 

for 2250s 18 

Figure 6. Pageable control program 
virtual storage reguirement (Part 1 of 

2) 19 

Figure 7. Size of pageable Protected 
Queue Areas (PQA) for all partitions. . 22 
Figure 8. Storage calculations for 
supervisor services, overlay 
supervisor and loader residing in a 

partition (Part 1 of 3) 25 

Figure 9. Partition storage 
reguirement for IBM-supplied 

Processing Programs 28 

Figure 10. Partition storage required 
by IBM-supplied utility programs and 

service aids (Part 1 of 7) 29 

Figure 11. IEHDASDR buffer workarea 

size for VS1 35 

Figure 12. Real Storage Organization 

for the VS1 system 36 

Figure 13. Options for CTRLPROG, 
DATAMGT, GRAPHICS, SVCTABLE, SCHEDULR, 

SECONSLE macros 38 

Figure 14. Input/output supervisor 
requirements, channel dependent. ... 39 
Figure 15. Input/output supervisor 
reguirements, I/O device dependent. . . 40 
Figure 15. Input/output supervisor 
reguirements, I/O device dependent. . . 41 
Figure 16. RTAM Real storage 

requirements 42 

Figure 17. Size of the supervisor 

nucleus (Part 1 of 2) 43 

Figure 18. Total System Queue Area 

reguirement 47 

Figure 19. Processing program fixed 

storage requirements 49 

Figure 20. Real storage reguirement 

for system initialization. 50 

Figure 21. Partition requirement for 

CRJE (Part 1 of 2) 51 

Figure 22. Coding space estimate for 

BISAM without WRITE KN 54 

Figure 23. Channel program space 

estimate for BISAM without WRITE KN. . 54 

Figure 24. Coding space estimate for 

BISAM with WRITE KN 55 

Figure 25. Channel program space 

estimate for BISAM with WRITE KN. ... 56 

Figure 26. Control block space 

estimate for BISAM 56 

Figure 27. Virtual storage 

reguirement for Graphic Access Method. 58 



Figure 28. Estimate A1 for Graphic 
Support 58 

Figure 29. Estimate A2 for Graphic 
Support 58 

Figure 30. Estimate B1 for Graphic 

Support 59 

Figure 31. Estimate B2 for Graphic 
Support 59 

Figure 32. QISAM buffer area 

requirement 60 

Figure 33. QISAM coding-space 

estimate for data-set-creation 61 

Figure 34. QISAM channel program 

space estimate for data-set-creation. . 61 

Figure 35. QISAM control-block space 

estimate for data set creation 62 

Figure 36. QISAM coding space 

estimate for data set scanning 62 

Figure 37. QISAM channel-program 

space estimate for data set scanning. . 63 

Figure 38. QISAM control block space 

estimate for data set scanning 63 

Figure 39. BTAM coding-space 

estimate 64 

Figure 40. BTAM control-information 
space estimate by device type (Part 1 

of 2) 65 

Figure 41. BTAM control block space 

for each line group 66 

Figure 42. BTAM control block space 

for each line 67 

Figure 43. BTAM channel program space 
estimate by device type per line. ... 68 
Figure 44. Storage reguirement for 
code-translation tables for BTAM. . . .69 
Figure 45. Virtual storage 

reguirement for BSAM, QSAM 70 

Figure 46. Estimate A x for BSAM. ... 71 
Figure 47. Estimate h ± for QSAM. ... 71 
Figure 48. Estimate A 2 for BSAM and 

QSAM (Part 1 of 2) 72 

Figure 49. Estimate A 2 for BSAM when 

creating a Direct Data Set 74 

Figure 50. Estimate B ± for BSAM (Part 

1 of 3) 75 

Figure 51. Estimate B ± for QSAM 
(Simple buffering) (Part 1 of 2) . ... 78 
Figure 52. Estimate Bj. for QSAM 

(Exchange Buffering) . 80 

Figure 53. Estimate B 2 for BSAM and 

QSAM (without user totaling) 81 

Figure 54. Estimate B 2 for BSAM and 

QSAM (with user totaling). 82 

Figure 55. Estimate B 3 for BSAM and 

QSAM (Part 1 of 2) . . 83 

Figure 56. Estimate B 4 for QSAM. ... 84 
Figure 57. Virtual storage 

reguirement for BDAM 86 

Figure 58. Estimate h ± for BDAM. ... 86 
Figure 59. Estimate A 2 for BDAM. ... 87 
Figure 60. Estimate B ± for BDAM. ... 87 
Figure 61. Estimate B 2 for BDAM. ... 88 



Figures 9 



Figure 62. Estimate B 3 for BDAM. ... 88 
Figure 63. Estimate B^ for 

BDAM - Dynamic Buffering Only 89 

Figure 64. Virtual storage 

requirement for BPAM. 90 

Figure 65. Storage requirement for 

the message-control program 91 

Figure 66. Estimate M for TCAM 

Message Control Program (Part 1 of 4) . 92 

Figure 67. Estimate I. for TCAM 

Message Control Program (Part 1 of 2) . 96 

Figure 68. Estimate C for TCAM 

Message Control Program (Part 1 of 2) . 98 

Figure 69. Estimate P for TCAM 

Message Control Program. . 100 

Figure 70. Estimate for message 

control program 101 

Figure 71. Estimate A for TCAM 

Application Programs 102 

Figure 72. Estimate T for TCAM 

Application Programs. . 103 

Figure 73. Fixed Real Storage for 

Message Control Program 104 

Figure 74. Estimate L for TCAM MCP 

Real Storage Requirements .104 

Figure 75. Estimate for TCAM MCP 

Real Storage Requirements 105 

Figure 76. Summary of the required 
and optional system data sets. (Part 1 

of 2) . 111 

Figure 76. Summary of the reguired 
and optional system data sets. (Part 2 

of 2) 112 

Figure 77. SVC library track 

requirements 116 



Figure 78. Device parameters for 

LOGREC. 117 

Figure 79. Auxiliary storage 

requirements for SYS1.SAMPLIB 117 

Figure 80. Auxiliary storage 

requirement for SYS1.PAGE 118 

Figure 81. Track requirement for the 

Link Library 119 

Figure 82. Track requirements for VS1 

Scheduler on SYS1. SYSJOBQE 120 

Figure 83. SYS1. SYSJOBQE space 

requirements for RTAM 121 

Figure 84. SYS1.SYSP00L space 

requirements 122 

Figure 85. SWADS track requirements. .125 
Figure 86. Auxiliary storage 
requirement for the Macro Library. . .128 
Figure 87. Auxiliary storage 
requirement for the subroutine 

libraries .129 

Figure 88. Auxiliary storage 
requirement for the checkpoint restart 

data set .130 

Fiqure 89. Track capacity for TCAM 
messaqe queue data set "on an IBM 

2314/2319 131 

Figure 90. Size of the TCAM 

checkpoint data set. 132 

Figure 91. Work-space requirement for 

Assembler XF 133 

Figure 92. Total storage requirement 

for Type 3 and 4 SVC routines 135 

Figure 93. Total storage requirement 

for error recovery routines 155 

Figure 94. Total storage requirement 

for Access Method Modules 159 



10 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Introduction 



0S/VS1 is a set of control program and processing modules that you can combine in various 
ways during system generation. The storage reguired by your installation depends on your 
machine configuration and the control program and programming options that you select. 



Storage Areas 

Your total storage requirements include virtual, real, and auxiliary storage. 



Virtual Storage 

Virtual storage is an addressing/storage concept that provides the installation with as 
many as 16,777,216 bytes of storage (accessible to programs). The virtual storage is 
contained on auxiliary storage devices (direct access storage devices) in units of 2048 
bytes, referred to as pages. These pages are transferred into and out of rea l storage as 
they are needed by the system or by your programs. The process of transfer is called 
paging and is handled entirely by the VS1 control program. For a comprehensive 
discussion of virtual storage and the paging process, refer to the IB M System/370, System 
Summar y, GA22-7001, in the section titled How Vir t ual Storage Work s. 



REAL STORAGE 

Real storage is the system (hardware) storage from which the CPU directly obtains 
instructions and data and to which it can return results to the problem program. It 
corresponds to ma i n storage in other IBM operating systems. 



AUXILIARY STORAGE 

Your operating system requires input/output devices to contain virtual storage, and for 
system residence libraries, job queues, spooled data sets, and work space used by control 
and processing programs. The minimum requirement is three direct access storage devices, 
of which at least two must be IBM 2314, 2319, or 3330 disk drives. The remaining disk 
can be a 2305-2. 



RECOVERY MANAGEMENT STORAGE 

The operating system reguires storage to perform recovery management. The recovery 
management procedures record system environment data at the time of a machine malfunction 
and provide an analysis of this data to determine whether recovery is feasible. The data 
is arranged in a usable format and written on the LOGREC data set. . . 

Four recovery management facilities are available in VS1: 

Machine Check Handler (MCH) : This program processes machine-check interruptions. 
Depending upon the severity of the malfunction, the machine-check handler does one of 
the following: 

Introduction 11 



• Restores the system to normal operation. 

• Terminates tasks associated with the malfunction so the system can resume 
processing. 

• Places the system in the wait state. 

In all cases, diagnostic messages and error records are written. 

Channel Check Handler (CCH) : This program receives control after the detection of a 
channel-data check, channel-control check, or interface-control check. CCH, for 
channel control checks and interface checks, does the following: 

• Indicates the results of the analysis of the error for later use by the 
error-recovery procedures when they are set up for a retry of the I/O operation. 

• Constructs a record of the error environment. When this record is later 
recorded, a message is issued to inform the operator that a channel-detected 
error has been recorded on LOGREC. 

For channel-data checks, CCH constructs a record of the error. The error-recovery 
procedures do not require information from CCH to retry I/O operations on the channel 
where the data check occurred. 

Alternate Path Retry (APR) : This program allows an I/O operation that has developed 
an error on one channel path to be retried on another channel path (if it is assigned 
to the device performing the I/O operation) . Alternate Path Retry also provides the 
capability to vary a path to a device online or offline. 

Dynamic Device Reconfiguration (DDR) : This program, upon receiving a system or 
operator request, permits a demountable volume to be moved from one device to another 
and repositioned if necessary. This enables you to bypass various I/O errors, and is 
done without abnormally terminating the affected job or performing another IPL. 



12 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Page of GC24-5094-1, revised by TNL GN24-5463, February 1, 1973 



Storage Characteristics 



Virtual storage in VS1 is divided into two areas, pageable and nonpageable. 









Partitions 


Pageable Supervisor 


N-1 








2 


1 























Resident 
Nucleus 


System 
Queue 
Area 


Virtual = Real 






- 










Job 
Entry 
Sub- 
system 


Error 
Recovery 


Type 3-4 

SVC 

Routines 


Access 
Modules 


BLDL 
Table 


Pageable 

System 

Queue 

Area 

(PSQA) 


SVC 

Transient 

Area 


I/O 

Transient 

Area 


Dump 
Area 



\ Low Address 



yv 



Legend 



Nonpageable Area 
I 1 Required portion of the nonpageable area. 



v 

Pageable Area 



High Address / 



J Features shown in the pageable supervisor area that may be pageable or nonpageable at the user's option. 
Resident error recovery procedures are always nonpageable. 



N Number of partitions generated. 

Figure 1. Virtual storage Organization for the VS1 system. 

NONPAGEABLE STORAGE 

Nonpageable control program storage is virtual storage that is allocated to the control 
program during system generation and IPL. The size of nonpageable storage is set by the 
user when he specifies the location of the virtual=real line at IPL time. If the size of 
real storage is less than 512K, the V=R line is egual to the real storage size. For 
systems with greater than 512K of real storage, the lower limit (and default value) is 
512K and the upper limit is the size of real storage. 



PAGEABLE STORAGE 

Pageable virtual storage is used by control and problem program to perform user-requested 
operations. In VS1, pageable virtual storage is divided (at system generation or at IPL) 
into a fixed number of partitions, each of a fixed size. (You can change the number 
and/or size of the partitions at IPL time.) 



Introduction 13 



Estimating Virtual Storage Size 



The virtual storage size (specified at system generation or IPL) must be as large as the 
sum of the pageable and nonpageable virtual reguirements (see Figure 1) . The nonpageable 
virtual storage reguirement is the sum of the resident nucleus (Supervisor) and V=R space 
described in a later section. The pageable virtual reguirement is the sum of the 
partition sizes specified at system generation or IPL and the pageable supervisor 
including the user option area and the Job Entry Subsystem area. 

Pageable Supervisor 

The pageable supervisor consists of the following areas (see Figure 1): 

Dump area 

I/O transient area (for non-resident error handling routines) 

SVC transient area 

BLDL table (can be fixed in real storage) 

Access Method Modules (see 0S/VS1 Planning an d Use Guid e listed in the Preface ) 

Type 3 and 4 SVC routines (user option) 

Error recovery procedures (user option) 

Job Entry Subsystem 

Pageable System Queue Area 

The pageable supervisor contains the following functions: 

ATTACH 

Communications task 

DISABLE 

Engueue/degueue 

EXTRACT 

FIND/BLDL/CONVTTR 

IDENTIFY 

LINK/LOAD/XCTL/FINCH 

Master scheduler 

Program FETCH, if FETCH=PC1 is not specified 

SEGLD/SEGRT 

SPIE 

SYNCH 

TIME, if only one partition is in the system 

Pageable Job Entry Subsystem (JES) 

The pageable Job Entry subsystem area is a part of the pageable control program (Figure 
1) . All of the JES area is pageable with two exceptions. At system initialization there 
is one page of fixed PQA reguired for the job entry subsystem. A minimum of one page is 
fixed for the first reader and one page fixed for the first writer that is started. If 
additional reader (s) /writer (s) are started in the system, additional pages are 
dynamically fixed in real storage as required. 

User Options 

Certain options and specifications in the system generation process alter the virtual 
storage reguirements. For instance, the number of concurrent system readers and writers 
and their control intervals (number of chained CCRs) , the block size of PROCLIB, and 
non-unit record input/output devices, all affect the amount of pageable virtual storage. 

14 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Also, the installation may elect to integrate its own SYSOOT writers, SMF processors, 
remote entry subsystem (RES) or job output separator routines, all of which are part of 
the pageable virtual storage area and must be added to the total storage reguirement. 



Estimating Pageable Virtual Storage 

The pageable virtual storage comprises two general areas: 

• Pageable control program 

• Partition reguirements 

The amount of JES buffer storage in the JES area of the pageable control program 
(Figure 1) is determined by the number and size of buffers specified in the JES macro 
during system generation. The optimum buffer size is determined by the block size that 
is most efficient for the track capacity of the SYS1.SYSP00L devices. Another factor to 
consider is that larger buffers decrease the I/O freguency of access to SYS1.SYSP00L. 
Figure 2 aids you in calculating the optimum number of JES buffers to specify in the 
pageable JES calculation. Figure 3. 



r ■" ~ — ~ i - - - -" — ™ -i - -" ■" — i 

| Calculation | Description I Enter Values | 
i i i i 


I 1 i i 

| 3 x R | R = the maximum number of concurrent | | 


| H | H = the maximum number of concurrent | j 


| max(3P,D) j The maximum of either 3P or D where: | j 

| | P = the maximum number of concurrent | j 
| | partitions. I | 
| | D = the maximum number of SYSIN/SYSOUT data 1 | 
| j sets opened concurrently by all executing | | 


| | OPTIMUM NUMBER OF JES BUFFERS (TOTAL SUM) . .| | 



Figure 2. Optimum number of JES buffers reguired. 

Although a slight underestimation of the number of buffers needed does not seriously 
degrade performance nor consistently put tasks into a wait state, it does cause 
preempting of buffers already allocated to other data sets. Those tasks whose buffers 
have been preempted must then reobtain buffers when they are ready to address the data 
sets. On the other hand, an overestimation of the number of buffers needed does not 
adversely affect performance at all, since extra buffers are reflected in real storage 
only when they are addressed. Figure 3 aids you in calculating the size of the JES 
pageable area of the control program. 



Estimating Virtual Storage Size 15 



T r 

SYSGEN 
Default 



Calculation 



Description 



Enter 
Values! 



(U+4.3W+6.3R) 1024 



3B 



2U0R x Y 



72 R 



396W x Z 



72W 



N X S 



1WN 



U = the total number of K- bytes of virtual 

storage required for any user-written 
writers, job-separators, or SMF 

processors. This number should include 

the module sizes and work space 

requirements. 
W = the maximum number of writers specified 

at system generation or in the JESPARMS 

member of SYS1.PARMLIB. 
R = the maximum number of readers specified 

at system generation or in the JESPARMS 

member of SYS1. PARMLIB . 



83,500 
11,162 



85,500| 



B = 



(b +b ± +...b n ) the sum of the 
sizes of all procedure libraries, 
non unit record input and output 
streams that can be processed 
concurrently (see Note 1)' . . . . 



R = see above 

Y = the control interval (number of CCWs 
chained together) used for unit 
record input devices 

R = see above 

W = see above 

Z = the control interval (number of CCWs 
chained together) for unit record 
output devices 



W = see above 

N = the number of JES buffers (NUMBDF) 

specified at system generation or in 
the JESPARMS member of SYS1. PARMLIB. 

S = the JES buffer size (BUFSIZE) specified 
at system generation or in the JESPARMS 
member of SYS1. PARMLIB rounded up to the 
rounded up to the next multiple of 8. 
The product of N and S should be 
rounded up to the nearest 2K 

N = see above 

specified at system generation or in 
SYS1. PARMLIB. 

TOTAL SOM THIS CHART (Notes 2, 3) . . . 



1,200 



72 



2,376 



72 



8,192 



1,008 



107,582 



Notes: 

1. If a procedure library is blocked to 800 bytes, and it is used concurrently 
with two readers, then 800 must be used twice in calculating the value for B. 

2. This sum is required to calculate the size of the pageable control program 
virtual storage in Figure 6. 

3. If the JES macro is not specified at sysgen time, this default total is 
assumed. 



Figure 3. Pageable JES storage requirements. 



16 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



RTAM Program Virtual Storage 

To estimate the control program virtual storage requirement for the RTAM pseud o- partition 
use Figure 4. 



i 1 

Enter Values | 
, 1 



| Calculation 



Description 



2B 



11C 



132D (Note 1) 

144E (Note 1) 

144F (Note 1) 

(44 + G)M 



1621 (Note 1) 

[157 (J+1)+2] 
(Note 1) 



128 + 20N 
8 + L 

52 M 

P 

Q 



A = 32,768 for multileaving and 
nonmultileaving support 
= 30,720 for nonmultileaving support 

only (2770 and/or 2780) 
= 29,696 for multileaving support only. 
B = the number of line tables defined 
by the LINE macro at RTAM 
system generation. 
C = the size of the terminal table 
defined by the TERMINAL macro at 
RTAM system generation. 
D = the number of remote readers. 
E = the number of remote printers. 
F = the number of remote punches. 

G = the value specified by the 

MXINTBR parameter at RTAM system 

generation, rounded up to a full word. 
M = the number of end-use devices (sum of 

D,E, and F above). 
I = the value of CNMSGNO parameter 

specified at RTAM system generation. 
J = the value specified by the 

STBOFNO parameter at RTAM system 

generation. The total is rounded up to 

the next full word. 
N = the maximum number of lines defined by 

RTAM generation (Note 1) 
L = the size of the parm field on 

the EXEC statement of the 

START RTAM procedure 
M = the number of end-use devices (sum of 

D,E, and F above) . 
P = total fixed RTAM storage requirements 

as calculated in Figure 16. 
Q = value of EXTRA parameter if coded 

in SYS1.PARMLIB member. 



14,356 



TOTAL THIS CHART (Note 2, 3) 



Notes: 

1. Can be overridden by a SYS1.PARMLIB member. 

2. This sum is required to calculate the size of the pageable control program 
virtual storage in Figure 6. 

3. Round total up to the next multiple of 2K. 



Figure 4. Program virtual RTAM storage requirements. 



Estimating Virtual Storage Size 17 



Pageable Storage for 2250s 

To estimate the pageable control program virtual storage for system with 2250s as a 
secondary console, use Figure 5. 



| Calculation 
H 



Description 



Enter Value | 
1 



48J 
36K 

40L 2 +24L 3 + 
24L J+ +340M] 



4 + [ (110N) + 
6(110N+0) t 
307.2) ] 



U736P 
1464Q 
3072R 

1126S 



J = the total number of display consoles 

K = the total number of defined display 
areas 

L t = 1 if system includes a 2250 display 

console; otherwise, 
L 2 = 1 if system includes a 2260 display 

console, otherwise, 
L 3 = 1 if system includes a 3277 Model 2 or, 

Model 158 console; otherwise, 
L = 1 if system includes a 3277 Model 1 

display console; otherwise, 
M = 1 if system includes a display console 

with a program function keyboard; 

otherwise, 

N = the total number of program function 

keys 
= the total number of display consoles 

with program function keys 

P = the number of 2250 display consoles 

Q = the number of 2260 display consoles 

R = the number of 3277 Model 2 consoles or 
Model 158 display console 

S = the number of 3277 Model 1 display 
consoles 

TOTAL SOM THIS CHART (Note 1) 



Note: 

1. This sun is required to calculate the size of the pageable control program. 
Figure 6. 



Figure 5. Pageable storage required for 2250s. 



18 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Page of GC24-5094-1, revised by TNL GN24-5463, February 1 , 1973 
Pageable Control Program Virtual Storage 
To estimate the pageable control program virtual storage use Figure 6. 



T 1 

Enter Values | 
1 



Calculation 



Description 



124K- 
8192 


-A 
x V 


216 x U 


24 x 


w 


168 x X 


2 




C 
40 X 


D 



a = 



o = 

w = 

x = 

z = 

c = 

d = 

E, = 



Pi = 

Fa = 

G = 

H = 

I = 



43,008 (21 pages) if 
partition 

45,056 (22 pages) if 
than one partition, 
see above, reguired f 
the number of megabyt 
storage specified at 
(default VIRTUAL = 10 
the number of devices 
consoles from SCHEDtJL 
macro. 

the number of operato 
from SCHEDOLR sysgen 
the number of WTO buf 
sysgen macro, 
total calculated from 
2250s are in system; 
the size of user Type 
the number of module 
lists in SYS1.PARMLIB 
nearest multiple of 2 



system has only 1 

system has more 

or pageable SQA. 
es of virtual 
system generation 
24) or IPL time . . . 
used as operator 
R/SECONSOLE sysgen 

r reply elements 

macro. 

fer from SCHEDOLR 

Figure 5 if 
otherwise, Z=0. 

2 SVC modules. . . . 
names on the IEABLDxx 

rounded up to the 
048 (see Note 1) . 



4400 + the total size of all resident 
reenterable load modules loaded pageable 
by NIP, + 3072 if real storage is less 
than 19 2K, rounded up to the next multiple 

of 2 048 (see Note 2) . 

the total size of all resident reenterable 
load modules loaded fixed by NIP rounded 
up to the next multiple of 2048 

(see Note 3) 

the total size of all resident Type 3 
and 4 SVC modules loaded pageable by NIP 
rounded up to the next multiple of 2048 

(see Note 4) 

the total size of all resident Type 3 
and 4 SVC modules loaded fixed by NIP 
rounded up to the next multiple of 2048 

(see Note 5) 

the total size of all error recovery 
procedures made resident by NIP rounded 
up to the nearest multiple of 2048 

(see Note 6) 

the size of the pageable JES (see 

Figure 3) 

the size of pageable RTAM (see 

Figure 4)... 

TOTAL THIS CHART* 



* Round up to next higher multiple of 64K. 



Figure 6. Pageable control program virtual storage reguirement (Part 1 of 2) 



Estimating Virtual Storage Size 19 



Notes: 

1. If the IBM-supplied standard list IEABLDOO is specified (enter 2048). For more 
information on IEABLDOO refer to OS/VS1 Pla n ning and Use Sni de listed in the 
Preface. 

2. If the IBM-supplied standard lists are used, IEAIGG00 and 02 contain the module 
names whose sizes should be summed for calculating Ex. For additional 
information on these standard lists, refer to Resident Reenterable Modu le 
Options, in the 0S /VS1 Planning and Use Gui de listed in the Preface . 

3. If the IBM-supplied standard lists are used, IEAIGG01 and 03 contain the module 
names whose sizes should be summed for calculating E 2 . (See Figure 94) 

4. If the IBM-supplied standard list is used, IEARSV00 contains the module names 
whose sizes should be summed for calculating F x . (See Figures 89, 92) For 
additional information on these standard lists, refer to the Resident SVC Routine 



Options , in the 0S/ VS1 Pla nn ing and Ose Gui de listed in the Preface . 

5. If the user has standard list IEARSV01, the sum of the module sizes on this list 
is used for calculating F 2 . (See Figure 92. ) 

6. If the user specified RESIDEN=ERP on CTRLPROG macro at sysgen, IBM standard list 
IEAIGE00. (See Figure 93.) For additional information on this standard list, 
refer to the 0S/ VS1 Pla nning and O s e gui de list in the Preface. 

i : j 

Figure 6. Pageable control program virtual storage reguirement (Part 2 of 2) . 

Example: For Estimating Pageable 
Control Program Virtual Storage 

The following example shows how the virtual storage reguirement for the pageable control 
program was estimated for a VS1 configuration consisting of: 

Number of partitions 5 

Virtual storage 2 megabytes 

Real storage 512K 

Number of readers and writers (maximum) .... 2 

Reader blocksize 8000 bytes 

Writer blocksize 13 30 bytes 

Number of Job Entry Subsystem buffers each 436 23 buffers 

The system contains standard Fetch, does not have multiple console support, and has 
one user Type 2 SVC module. Also, the standard lists IEAIGG00 and IEARSV00 are resident 
and pageable. The BLDL list is also pageable. 

A complete description of the system configuration can be found in the example 
following the section Estimat ing T otal Re al Stora ge. This same system configuration is 
also used in the example following the topic Estimating System Queue Area (SQA) 
Reguirement s . 

Example (calculated from Figure 6) 

Basic constant requirement 45,056 bytes 

Pageable SQA (126,976-45056) 81,921 bytes 

2 megabytes virtual storage 16,384 bytes 

1 operator console 216 bytes 

1 Type 2 user SVC module 212 bytes 

Pageable IEABLDOO list 2048 bytes 

Pageable IEAIGG00 list from Figure 94 

(rounded up to next 2K multiple) 20,480 bytes 

Pageable IEARSV00 list from Figure 92 

(rounded up to next 2K multiple) 124,928 bytes 

20 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Size of the Pageable JES (from Figure 3) 

Basic JES reguirement . 83,500 bytes 

JES variable reguirement 

(based on the number of 

readers, writers, JES buffers, 

blocksizes of procedure libraries 

etc.) 22^500 bytes 

Total 474,245 bytes 

Sound up factor to make reguirement 

a multiple of 64K 50,043 bytes 

Total pageable control 

program virtual storage 

reguirement 524,288 bytes 

Virtual Storage Space Available to 
All Partitions 

The area of virtual storage available to partitions in VS1 is the space above the 
nonpageable area and below the pageable control program area (see Figure 1). Its size 
can be calculated as follows: 

A- (B+C) 

Where: 

A = Total virtual storage size (S YSGEN or IPL variable) . 

B = Size of nonpageable area which is egual to the value of the VB parameter specified at 
IPL time; otherwise, it is egual to the lesser of 51 2K or the real storage size of 
CPO. 

C = Size of pageable control program (total from Figure 6) . 

Example: For a medium size system: 

Virtual storage size = 3072K (SYSGENed value) 
Control program area = 512K 
Real storage size of CPU = 512K 

3072K - (512K + 512K) = 2048K available to problem program partitions. 

How to Estimate the Size of a 
Partition in Virtual Storage 

The total size of any generated partition must be large enough to meet the following 
reguirements: 

• Protected' Queue Area (PQA) 

• Supervisor services 

• User program reguirements 

Protected Queue Area 

In addition to the space reguired by problem programs, the control program reguires space 
in each partition for functions specifically related to the active job. This space is 
referred to as the Protected Queue Area (PQA). Part of the total PQA reguirement is 
fixed and must reside within real storage at all times. The other part is pageable. 
Figure 7 aids you in calculating the total (pageable and fixed PQA reguirements for each 
partition). Both pageable and fixed PQA space may be dynamically extended by the VS 1 
system if the initial allocation is insufficient. 



Estimating Virtual Storage Size 21 



Page of GC24-5094-1, revised by TNL GN24-5463, February 1, 1973 



i!" 



Calculation 



Description 



SYSGEN 
Default 



Enter 
Values 



V = the number of K-bytes (1024) in the 
virtual size of the partition 
specified at system generation or IPL 

H = if FETCH=PCI is no t specified by 
the CTRLPROG macro. 
1600 if FETCH=PCI is specified. . . . 



500 



INITIAL FIXED PQA THIS PARTITION (Note 1 ) 



Note: 

1. Round up to the next multiple of 2K. The 7S1 system dynamically allocates 
additional PQA space within a partition if this initial allocation is 
insufficient to meet current system requirements. 



Figure 7. Size of pageable Protected Queue Areas (PQA) for all partitions. 



Supervisor Storage Requirements 

Storage is used by the control program while supervisor services and IBM-processing 
programs and utilities are being performed and also after control is returned to the 
program requiring these services. In VS1 the storage requirement for supervisor 
requirements is obtained from the partition. Therefore, the amount of storage required 



22 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



must be considered to calculate the optimum size for a partition. Supervisor 
requirements consist of the following: 

• Overlay Supervisor 

• Loader 

Figures 8-10 are provided to aid you in calculating the total storage required for 
Supervisor functions. 



OVERLAY SUPERVISOR 

If a load module used in a job step requires the overlay supervisor, the partition size 
required by the job step must be large enough to support the overlay supervisor modules. 
The overlay supervisor module types in VS1 are: 

• Basic module (synchronous overlay without check) 

• Advanced module (synchronous overlay with check) 

The basic module does not check whether a request for the overlay supervisor is valid; 
the advanced module does. Neither the basic nor advanced types permit overlay through 
the SEGLD macro instruction. However, the SEGLD macro can be used and is ignored by 
either the basic or advanced modules without resulting in an error. The size for each 
module is: 

i 1 1 

lOverlay Supervisorl Partition Requirement (bytes) | 

I 1 1 

| Basic module | 436 I 

|Advanced module j 512 | 

i j i 

An overlay supervisor operates through the use of tables created by the linkage 
editor. Because these tables are incorporated into the overlay program, their size must 
be considered in planning the partition size. 

The types of tables created for the overlay supervisor are: 

• Segment tables 

• Entry tables 

The segment table is a control section at the beginning of the root segment of the 
overlay program. Each segment of the overlay program including the root segment may 
contain one entry table. An entry table contains an entry for each symbol referred to by 
a V-type address constant except when: 

• The symbol is defined in a segment in the path of the segment containing the address 
constant, or 

• An entry table entry (ENTAB) for the symbol is in a segment path of the segment 
containing the address constant. 

In addition to the storage allocated to the SEGTABs and ENTABs, partition storage for 
a NOTE list is required to execute a program in overlay. The partition storage required 
for Overlay Supervisor Tables and Lists is: 

Estimating Virtual storage Size 23 



T 1 

Partition Requirement (bytes) 



Description 



Segment Table (SEGTAB) 
Each Entry Table (ENTAB) 
NOTE list 



4N + 24 
12 (M + 1) 
4N + 8 



Where: 

N = the number of segments in the program. 

M = the number of entries in ENTAB. 



LOADER 



The amount of partition storage required by the loader depends upon: 

• The size of the loader routine. 

• Data Management access methods that are used by the loader. 

• The size of the tables and buffers used by the loader. 

• The size of the program being loaded. 

The maximum amount of partition storage that the loader can obtain for its own tables 
and buffers, and the program is specified by the SIZE parameter. 

The loader always reserves 6144 bytes of partition storage for system use (includes 
the access method) . The amount of storage required by the loader for its tables and 
buffers is variable and depends upon the program being loaded and the processor used. 
Figure 8 aids you in calculating the pageable storage requirement for supervisor 
services, overlay supervisor and the loader in VS1 . 



24 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



r- 




r - ,,__..._.„ _ — ! 


Storage | 


r _ ... — — , 




Calculation 


Description 


Required 


Enter Values | 


I 










1 












SUPERVISOR 










SERVICES 


ABEND 


7280 
168 














ATTACH 










If floating point save area. . . . 


32 








If TQE 


112 






BLDL 










496 






DEQUEUE 










100 








Job Step Execution 








156+(16+4D)E 


D = the average number of devices 








+ (12 + 4G) F 


in each DD statement. 
E = the number of DD statements. 
F = the number of device pools. 
G = the average number of devices 

FIND 


496 






I IDENTIFY 










48 






LINK 










32 






| LOAD 








Load module on LINK or JOB lib. . 


40 








XCTL 










Load module in real storage . . . 













40 





Figure 8. Storage calculations for supervisor services, overlay supervisor and loader 
residing in a partition (Part 1 of 3). 



Estimating Virtual Storage Size 25 



r i 


— r — i ~ i 




| Storage | | 


| Calculation I 


Description | Required | Enter Values | 




i i i 




i i i 




RESERVE I | | 


| 34 x R | 


R = the length or rname used to | | | 




represent the serially | | | 




reusable resource (1 to | | | 








SETPRT I | | 




| 736 | | 




SPIE | | | 




| 48 | | 




STAE | | | 




| 16 | | 




STIMER with exit routine I I I 




. | 72 | | 




STOW | | | 




| 1738 | | 




' 1 1 


| OVERLAY 




| SUPERVISOR 


Basic 1 I 


| 436 x N 






Advanced I | 


1 512 x N 








l 


i II 


1 


I ii 


| OVERLAY 




| SUPERVISOR 




| TABLES-LISTS 


I SEGTAB I | 


| 24 + 4N 


[ N = the number of segments in the program. . | | 




1 ENTAB | | 


| 12(M+1) 






I NOTE list I | 


| 4N + 8 


I N = the number of segments in the program. . | | 




| TOTAL FOR OVERLAY TABLES AND LISTS . . . | | 



Figure 8. storage calculations for supervisor services, overlay 

supervisor and loader residing in a partition (Part 2 of 3) 



26 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



I 1 

Enter Values 



| Calculation 
I 



Description 

For tables and buffers 

A = the number of external symbols 

B = the number of external relocation 

dictionary entries referring to control 
sections processed by the loader 

C = the number of external symbols in any 

one input module 

D = SYSPRINT buffer number 

E = SYSPRINT blocksize 

F = SYSLIN buffer number 

G = SYSLIN blocksize 

TOTAL FOR ALL TABLES AND BUFFERS (Note 2) 

For control modules (Note 3) 

For processing modules (Note 3) 

For access method modules 

For system requirements 

TOTAL LOADER REQUIREMENT 



LOADER 
20 x A 
8 X B 

(528(C+1) )r32 

(DxE)+24 

(FxG)+24 



1506 



664 

13464 

6144 

1600 



Notes: 

1. This storage is required only when the shared DASD option is selected and 
a DEQ macro is issued to release a reserved device. 

2. The minimum size required for loader tables and buffers is 2000 bytes. 

3. These modules may reside in fixed real storage. 



Figure 8. Storage calculations for supervisor services, overlay supervisor and loader 
residing in a partition (Part 3 of 3) . 

The partition storage for VS1 also depends upon: 

• IBM-supplied processing services and programs selected (see Figure 9) . 

• IBM-supplied utilities and service aids selected (see Figure 10) . 

• Access Methods chosen (see Access Methods Section) . 



Estimating Virtual Storage Size 27 



r i 
| Calculation | 


Description 1 


i 

Enter Value | 


| PROCESSING 1 
| SERVICES | 


CHECKPOINT/RESTART 1 


1164 | 


| C | 
| (D+48) (E-2) | 


C = the amount of storage required to fill 




TOTAL CHECKPOINT/RESTART. . | 












OPEN/CLOSE 


1044 | 


| 1000(N-1) | 


N = the number of non-JES data sets opened 




| 1000 (B-1) | 


M = the number of JES data sets opened in 






TOTAL OPEN/CLOSE | 












EOV 




1 


Catalog 




1 

| PROCESSING 
| PROGRAMS 








OBR/MDR/RDE 






1 Assembler XF 






Linkage Editor 






| OLTEP 




■ 


• / 


• i 



Figure 9. Partition storage requirement for IBM-supplied Processing Programs. 



28 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



r — - - 
| Calculation 


r 

L 




"' ' "■ — " - "■ "- - -" — •*" i 

Description 


,,_ -" — ... — - 
Enter Value 


— i 

1 
j 




| 








-| 


| SYSTEM 












| OTILITITES 


I IEHATLAS 














14000 




1 B 


I R 


_ 


the maximum logical record length. 










rounded up to the next multiple of 2K . . 






| 16 X T 


T 


= 


the maximum number of records/track . . . 
TOTAL FOR IEHATLAS 










• 




I IEHDASDR (Analyze/Format function) 




I 










16000 




| N x B 


I N 


_ 


the number of operations to be performed 










(1 to 6) , see Note 3 








I B 


= 








| N x 344 


I N 


= 


the number of operations to be performed 






| M X 280 


| M 


= 


TOTAL IEHDASDR Analyze/Format function. . 




i 




I IEHDASDR (DOMP function) 




1 










19200 




| N X B 


I H 


_ 


the number of operations to be performed 










(1 to 6) , see Note 3 








I B. 


= 








| N x 360 


I N 


= 


the number of operations to be performed 








I H 


= 








| M X 280 












TOTAL IEHDASDR Dump function (Note 4) . . 






I 


L _.„ 








i 


I 


r 








I 




I IEHDASDR (RESTORE function) 














23400 




| 2B(N-1)+B 


I N 


_ 


the number of operations to be performed 










(1 to 6) , see Note 3 








I B 


= 








| N x 344 


I N 


= 


the number of operations to be performed 






| H x 280 


I M 


= 









Figure 10. Partition storage required by IBM-supplied utility programs and service aids 
(Part 1 of 7) . 



Estimating Virtual Storage Size 29 



Enter Value 



| Calculation 
I 



Description 



IEHMOVE 



B = the largest blocking in the job step, 
rounded up to the next multiple of 2K 
(see Note 1) 



TOTAL IEHMOVE 



GETALT 

Total bytes required is 11,800. 

LABEL 

Total bytes required is 11,920. 

POTIPL 

Total bytes required is 15,360. 

IEHINITT 

Total bytes required is 14,000. 

IEHLI ST 

Total bytes required is 32,000, 

I EHPR OGM 

Total bytes required is 28,000. 

IFHSTATR 



Total bytes required is 2000. , 

IEHI0S0P 

Total bytes required is 12,000. 



20000 



Figure 10. Partition storage required by IBM-supplied utility programs and 
service aids (Part 2 of 7) . 



30 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



| Calculation 

• 






Description | 


Enter Value | 


1 

| DATA SET 
| UTILITIES 


IEBCOHPR 












18000 | 


| 2 X L 


L 


= 


2048 if user header and trailer labels 




| 2 X B 


B 




the largest blocksize in the jobstep, 
rounded up to the next higher multiple 
of 2K. If format=VS and LRECL is less 
than 32K, then B is the maximum logical 
record length rounded up to the next 
highest multiple of 2K. 




1 E 


E 




the sum of the sizes of all user exit 
TOTAL IEBCOMPR 












IEBCOPY 












34000 | 


| 10 x A 


A 


= 


the maximum number of input data sets 




| 10 X B 


B 




the maximum number of member names, 
including new names. (This quantity is 
only required if SELECT or EXCLUDE is 




| (4 X C)+4 


c 


= 


the maximum number of new names 




| (10 x D)+80 


D 




the maximum number of input members 
referenced in the largest input data set 
specified in any COPY step. (This 
quantity is only required if EXCLUDE or 




I N 


N 


= 


the number of operations to be performed 




| 2 x P 


P 


= 


the maximum input or output blocksize 
rounded up to the next multiple of 2K, 
see Note 5. (The minimum value is 2000) . 




I u 


I o 


= 


6000 and is only used if an unload 















Figura 10. Partition storage required by IBM-supplied utility programs and 
service aids (Part 3 of 7) . 



Estimating Virtual Storage Size 31 



| Calculation 






Description | 


Enter Value | 
■ 


1 








i 




IEBTCRIN I 












10230 | 


| 2 x A I 


A 
E 


= 


BUFL on SYSDT1 | 




1 E | 


the sum of the sizes for all user exit | 




1 G 


G 


= 


the storage made available to the user 
exit routines, rounded up to the next 










TOTAL IEBTCRIN | 












IEBDG 












12000 | 


| 520 (H + 8) 


H 


= 


the number of FD statements. If H is 
less than or equal to 8 r enter 520. . . . 




| 512(1 v 18)1 


I 
C 


= 


the number of create statements. If I 

is less than or equal to 8, enter 

512 




1 c 


the sum of all field lengths on all FD 
statements. Each length should be 
rounded up to the next multiple of 8. . . 




| S+ (6 x J) 


S 


= 


the sum of all picture lengths on all 
CREATE statements. Round each length 






I J 


= 


the number of pictures 




| 8(K+90(O * 8)) 





= 


the number of user exit routines 






I K 
I Q 

I v 


= 


the dynamic storage requirement for 




| 8 x Q 


the logical record length of the output 
data set. If RECFM=U, then substitute 




| 176V 


the number of user-specified input and 











Figure 10. Partition storage required by IBM-supplied utility programs and 
service aids (Part 4 of 7) . 



32 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



r 1 

| Calculation 
i 


— .... . ,__, _ _ , 

Description 


— i 

Enter Value | 


i 


IEBGENER 










26000 | 


| 4 X B 


B = 


the largest blocksize in the jobstep 
rounded up to the next higher multiple 
of 2K. If format=VS and LRECL is less 
than 32K r then B is the maximum logical ! 
record length rounded up to the next 
highest multiple of 2K. 




| 2 x L 


L = 


2048 if user header and trailer labels 




1 E 


E = 


the sum of all sizes for user exit 




1 * 


F = 

- 


2048 for each group of MAX parameters I 
that are less than or equal to 200. . . . 

TOTAL IEBGENER 




l 






1 


IEBISAM 










8000 | 


1 R 


1 H = 


the maximum logical record length 
rounded up to the next highest multiple 
of 1K 






TOTAL -IEBISAM 








• 




IEBPTPCH 


I 


I 4 x B 


B = 


the largest blocksize in the jobstep 
rounded up to the next higher multiple 
of 2K. If format=VS and LRECL is less 
than 32K, than B is the maximum logical 
record length rounded up to the next 
highest multiple of 2K. 




1 E 


E = 


the sum of all sizes for user exit 




1 F 


F = 


2048 for each group of MAX parameters 
that are less than or equal to 200. . . . 





Figure 10. Partition storage required by IBM-supplied utility programs and 
service aids (Part 5 of 7) . 



Estimating Virtual Storage Size 33 



, — _ _ T _ __ ,.._ ,._, ._ . — . — — „_._.,..., . _._ ... T _.J 

| Calculation | Description I Enter Value | 


1 1 IEBUPDTE 1 1 
| | | 22000 | 


| 4 x B | E = the largest blocksize in the job step | j 
| | rounded up to the next higher multiple | I 
| j of 2K. If format=VS and LRECL is less | I 
| j than 32K r than B is the maximum logical j | 
| | record length rounded up to the next 1 1 
| j highest multiple of 2K. | | 

| 2 x L | L = 2048 if user header or trailer labels | | 
| E 1 E = the sum of all sizes for user exit | | 


| | TOTAL IEBUPDTE | j 


I 1 IEBEDIT 1 1 

II 11 


II 11 

| SERVICE | | | 
1 AIDS 1 HMASPZAP 1 1 


1 1 HHAPTFLE 1 1 


1 1 HMDSADMP 1 1 


1 1 HMDPRDMP 1 1 


1 1 HMBLIST | | 


1 1 Generalized Trace 1 1 



Figure 10. Partition storage required by IBM-supplied utility programs and 
service aids (Part 6 of 7) . 



34 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Notes: 

1. If the format specified for the data set is VS and LRECL is less than 
32K, use R instead of B in the calculation (see IEHATLAS) . 

2. Round the size of each routine to the next higher multiple of 2K and then 
add. 

3. If enough storage is provided, multiple operations are performed 
concurrently. 

4. Add 1 K if a permanent data check or missing address marker is encountered 
during a dump to SYSOOT. 

5. If the operation is a compress-in-place f P is the maximum track capacity 
of the device being used rounded up to the next multiple of 2K. If the 
value of P is 2K, the maximum input or output blocksize is 700. 



Figure 10. Partition storage required by IBM-supplied utility programs and 
service aids (Part 7 of 7) . 



I 

| Function 



| Device Type 



| ANALYZE/FORMAT 



h 



DUMP 



PDTIPL 



RESTORE 



2314/ 

2319 

Disk 



8192 



10240 



8000 



12888 



3330 
Disk 



14336 



18432 



8000 



16384 



Figure 11. IEHDASDR buffer workarea size for VS1. 



Estimating Virtual Storage Size 35 



Estimating Total Real Storage 



Real storage in the 7S1 system is organized as shown in Figure 12. 



REAL STORAGE 



■« Pageable Area 



Nonpageable 




VIRTUAL STORAGE 



Pageable 



«ws 



mj 



SOA 



; . -! 



Job Entry 
Subsystem 



User Error 
Recovery 
Procedures 



Type 3-4 

SVC 

Routines 



Access 
Method 
Modules 



61.01. 

Tablet 



SVC 

Transient 
Area 



I/O 

Transient 

Area 






High Address 



High Address - 



Figure 12. Real Storage Organization for the VS1 system. 

The total fixed real storage reguirement at any time consists of: 

Supervisor nucleus including I/O supervisor (constant) , see Figure 17. 

BLDL list, if fixed (constant) , see Figure 6, item D. 

Total fixed modules (constant) , see Figure 6, items E a and F 2 . 

Recovery management support, see Figure 6, item G. 

System Queue Area (dynamic with system generation or IPL minimum), see Figure 17, 
item Z. 

Protected Queue Area (dynamic) . 

Processing program fixed (installation and application dependent) . 

RTAM fixed storage requirements. 



Figure 12 shows how rea 
pageable sections. The re 
necessarily the same posit 
and the initial SQA reques 
algorithm that treats each 
real storage. Thus, the i 
high end of real storage a 
available to the system fo 
Figure 12. 



1 storage is organized i 
lative positions occupie 
ions occupied in all cas 
t. All other areas come 
page request separately 
nitial PQA assignment fo 
s shown in the figure, 
r paging although this a 



n VS1 into fixed (not pageable) and 
d by areas in this figure are not 
es, except for the Supervisor nucleus 
under the control of the system paging 
and selects an optimum assignment in 
r partitions may not be located at the 
At least 16K of real storage must be 
rea need not be contiguous as shown in 



The supervisor nucleus (including the I/O Supervisor and error recovery procedures for 
all DASD devices) is fixed at all times and always occupies the lowest addresses in real 
storage. Immediately above the supervisor nucleus is the System Queue Area (SQA) used to 
hold control tables for system tasks. The SQA like the nucleus is always fixed in real 
storage. If during system operation the SQA space must be extended, the control program 
automatically obtains more space from the pageable area of real storage (see Figure 12) . 
The space for the extended SQA is fixed by the control program and cannot be paged out to 
virtual storage. 



36 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Also, in real storage there is a Protected Queue Area (PQA) for each partition of 
virtual storage. The PQA contains control tables for problem program tasks, and like the 
SQA, these areas are always fixed in real storage. If during system operation additional 
space is reguired for the PQAs, the system dynamically extends these areas into the 
pageable areas of real storage. Unlike the extended SQA, an extended PQA is either fixed 
in real storage or made pageable by the control program. 

In addition, user specified supervisor options may be permanently fixed in real 
storage. The remaining free areas of real storage (Figure 12) are available for user 
problem programs that are paged in and out of real storage as reguired. This area of 
real storage may also be used to process virtual=real jobs provided the total reguired 
storage area for these jobs is contiguous. 

The pageable area of real storage must be large enough at all times to contain short 
duration page fixes for the largest expected I/O reguest (channel program and control 
blocks) plus 16K absolute minimum for paging. 

Input/Output Supervisor Requirements 

The VS1 system reguires storage for the input/output supervisor. Part of this 
reguirement is included in the fixed storage reguirement. The total amount of fixed IOS 
storage depends upon the options selected and the I/O configuration at system generation. 
Figure 13 shows the various supervisor options. Figures 14 and 15 show the channel 
dependent and device dependent IOS fixed storage reguirements for VS1. 



Estimating Total Real Storage 37 



Page of GC24-5094-1 f revised by TNL GN24-5463, February 1, 1973 



1 1 — - ■'- T 1 ■'■ ' — ■ "- 1 " 1 

| Macro | | Storage Reg. | Your Reg. | 
| Instruction | Control Program Option | (bytes) | (bytes) | 
ii ill 


| CTRLPROG | PCI Fetch I 3300 | I 

I | Dynamic Dispatching | 1044 | | 
| | Time Slicing I 432 | I 
| | Trace I I I 
| | Each trace table entry | 18 | I 
| | NODAV(1) | -132 | | 
| | DDR | 2380 | | 
| | DDR+DDRSYS (Note 4) | 4044 | | 

II 1 . 1 1 


1 1 ..... 1 11 
| DATAMGT | BDAM | Included | | 
| | BTAM | 186 | | 
| | ISAM | 168 | | 
| | TCAM | 1044 | | 
ii i ii 


II III 

| GRAPHICS | Graphic Programming Services | 600 | | 
| | Each 2250 Model 1: | | | 
| | with 4K buffer | 32 | | 
| | with 8K buffer | 48 | | 
ii ill 


ll ill 

| SVCTABLE | User added SVC routine | 24 | | 
| | Each resident Type 1 | | | 
| | or 2 SVC routine | 4 | I 
| | Each transient SVC routine: | I I 
| | No option TRSVCTBL j | | 
| | in CTRLPROG macro | 1 | I 
| | TRSVCTBL in CTRLPROG | | | 
| | macro | 6 | | 


| SCHED0LR | LOG | 2136 | | 
| | SMF=FU11 | 2300 | | 
| | ESV (Note 2) | | | 
| | Alternate console (Note 5) | 120 | | 
| | LOADBAL | 140 | | 
ll ill 


II 1 11 
| SECONSLE | Each composite console (3) | 128 | | 
| ,| Each console that is not a | | | 
| | composite console (3) | 64 j j 
| | Each 2740 used as a | I I 
| | secondary console (3) | 440 | I 
ii ' I 1 


| TOTAL REQUIREMENT THIS TABLE . . . . | | 
l ' I 


| Notes: | 

| 1. The NODAV option cancels DASD volume serial number checking. If | 
| you use this option, the size of fixed storage for the IOS | 
| resident code is decreased by the amount shown. I 

| 2. If you specify this option and do not include SMF, add 2300 | 
| bytes. | 

| 3. For the first 2740 specified, add 3512 bytes. For each | 
| additional 2740, add 440 bytes. I 

j 4. If MCS is not specified, subtract 100 bytes. | 

| 5. See Figure 6 for pageable control program virtual storage | 
| reguirements for display consoles. I 



Figure 13. Options for CTRLPROG, DATAMGT, GRAPHICS, SVCTABLE, SCHEDULR, SECONSLE macros. 



38 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



i — ■ - — — r t t 

| ; | Storage Req. | Youir Req. | 
| Description | (bytes) | (bytes) | 


| Multiplexor channel: j | 60 | | 
| • Priority queueing 1 j 6 | | 
| • alternate selector channel j 4 | | 
| Each associated logicaJL channel 6 1 1 

1 


1 I 1 | | 
| Selector or block multilplexor channel: | | | 
j • Each channel - if the number of j | | 
| devices exceeds 240,, add 12 | | | 
| bytes for each logical channel. | 50 | | 
j • Second channel path j on each chan. | 50 | j 
| • Each additional channel path on | | | 
j each channel. f 3 2 I | 
| • With priority queuing, each | | | 
| channel path on eachi channel | | | 
| requires additional storage. j 6 j | 
| • First channel path uith direct | | | 
| access devices. If you select | 1 1 
j shared DASD, add 8 bytes. | 32 | | 
| • Each additional path with | | | 
| direct access on each channel. | 12 j | 
| • Each channel switch [since IOS j | | 
| does not provide foi: switching j | | 
| devices onto multipjLexor chan. | 18 j | 


| Queuing capability: III 
j • FIFO - first in, fiirst out | | | 
| • Ordered seek queuing j 264 . | j 
| • Priority j | 104 | | 
| Each queued I/O requesft (Note 1) j 20 | | 


| DDR | 160 | | 
i '11 


| TOTAL IOSj REQUIREMENT THIS TABLE . . . . | | 


1 1 

I Note: I 
1 < 1 
| 1. The maximum number of I/O requests than can be queued, pendingl 
| satisfaction by the channels, is specified at system | 
| generation in the MAXIO parameter of the CTRLPROG macro | 
| instruction. I 



Figure 14. Input/output, supervisor requirements, channel dependent, 



Estimating Total Real Storage 39 



1 


1 


— i 
Storage Reg. | 


1 

Your Reg. | 




Description - 1 


(bytes) | 


(bytes) | 


| Unit record capability: I 


1 






Each 2250 1 


34 






Each display device (2250,2260) | 


56 | 






Each 3 505/3525 reader/punch 


32 | 






Each unit record device (Note 1) | 


56 | 






Each 1403 printer with UCS I 


64 | 






Each optical character reader | 


54 | 






Each 2495 tape cartridge reader I 


54 | 






Each magnetic character reader | 


48 




| Graphic capability I 


206 




1 Magnetic tape capability: 


102 | 




I • 


Any read/write tape adapter unit | 


42 




1 • 


Each 2400 magnetic tape drive 
(Note 2) 


86 | 




| • 


Any 3400 tape 


76 




1 • 


Any 3400 tape with FIFO gueuing 


8 I 




1 • 


Any 3400 tape with priority gueuing 


8 




1 * 


Each 3420 magnetic tape (Note 5) 


120 




I • 


Each 3410 magnetic tape (Note 5) 


108 




| Telecommunication capability: 


62 




1 • 


Each telecommunications line grp. 


20 




i • 


Each telecommunications line 


58 


i 


| Direct access capability: 


Included 


i 


I • 


APR 


| 232 




I • 


Any 2305-2 


522 




| • 


Any 2305-2 with APR (Note 4) 


544 




i • 


Any 2305-2 with SMF 


[ 530 




I • 


Any 2305-2 with APR and SMF 


552 




I • 


Any 3330 


324 




1 • 


Each 2305-2 


1986 




1 • 


Each address for a 2314/2319 


| 234 




1 • 


Each address for a 3330 


246 




1 • 


Reserve release for shared DASD 








2314/2319 


492 






3330 


140 






2305-2 


192 




1 • 


Resident error routines: (Note 3) 
Record overflow, any number of 
devices (if 2314/2319s is only 
device this guantity is not 








necessary) 


| 272 






Any 23 05-2 


| 80 






Any 3330 


I 260 






Any RPS (rotational position 








sensing) device 


| 700 

• 


i i 




TOTAL IOS REQUIREMENT THIS 


CHART .... 


I i 
1 1 



Figure 15. Input/output supervisor reguirements, I/O device dependent, 
(Part 1 of 2) 



40 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Notes: 

1 . The following rules 
A console is con side 
A 254 card reader-p 
A card reader and pr 
as 2 nonconsole devi 

2. If you select EVA, a 
drive. If you selec 
tape drive. If you 
bytes for each tape 
then only consider t 
included in the 76 b 

3. If a 3330 and 2305 a 
required. 

4. Included with system 
macro. 

5. VES is always initia 



apply: 
red a unit 
unch count 
inter used 
ces. 

dd 22 byte 
t ESV, add 
select ESV 
drive. If 
he device 
ytes shown 
re shared 



record device, 
s as 2 unit record devices, 
as a composite console counts 

s plus 8 bytes for each tape 
22 bytes plus 16 bytes for each 
and EVA, add 22 bytes plus 16 
any 3400 device is present, 

quantity (the other 22 bytes are 
for 3400 support. 

DASD, an additional 132 bytes is 



if OPTCHAN is specified in the I/O device 
Ited with 3400 support. 



Figure 15. Input/output supervisor requirements, I/O device dependent. 
(Part 2 of 2) 



Fixed RTAM Real Storage 



To calculate the fixed real storage requirement for RTAM use Figure 16, 



Estimating Total Real Storage 41 



, 

j I Enter Values | 

-H 1 



Calculation 



Description 



112A 

252B 

4+12C 

D 

E 



A = the maximum number of lines defined by 
RTAM generation (Note 1) 

B = the number of end-use devices. 

C = the number of buffer pages. (Note 2) 

D = the TP buffer size (Note 3) 

E = fixed PQA for RTAM pseudo-partition 



7596 



2048 



— - -+■ 
TOTAL THIS CHART (Note 4) | 



Notes: 

1. Can be overridden by a SYS1.PARMLIB member. 

2. The number of buffer pages is calculated as follows: 

""(VALUE OF TPBUFSIZ+176) times the value of TPBDF specified at RTAM system 
generation. 

Round the result up to the next page and divide by 2K to obtain the 
number of pages. 

3. The TP buffer size is calculated as follows: 

(VALUE OF TPBUFSIZ+176) times the value of TPBUF specified at RTAM system 
generation. Round the result up to the next page to obtain the number of 
bytes. Each page is fixed on an as needed basis. 

4. This sum is required to calculate the total RTAM virtual storage 
requirement. Figure 4. 



Figure 16. RTAM Real Storage requirements. 



Supervisor Nucleus 



Figure 17 aids you in calculating the size of the supervisor nucleus residing in real 
storage. 



42 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



r i 
| Calculation 
i 


r ■ '" — ' — ' - ' — i 

Description 1 


r — — 

Enter Value 


— i 


1 




59,500 




1 s 


S 


= 


2700 if more than one partition. 




1 T 


Total sum of options selected (Figure 13) 
Total sum for I/O tables (Figures 14 and 15) 
Total sum for user Type 1 SVC modules .... 






| t 16384 


U 


— 


the number of megabytes of virtual storage 
specified at system generation (default 
1024) or IPL time. 






I v = 








64 




| 16H 
| 161 


H 

I 


= 


the number of extents in the SVCLIB. 
the number of extents in first LinkLib. 
(For each additional LinkLib add 32+16 
times the number of extents in data set) . 




1 w 


W 


= 


288 if CPU model is 145 
if CPU model is 135 \ 






1 x 


X 


= 


-1 ,625 i-f^on'ly one partition 

if ,oniy_one partition. (Note_ 4) 






| (A r 2 56) -360 


A 


■ 


the real storage size. This guantity 






| T = 124 (J+K) 

I 1 






J 
K 


= 


number of— i 2314/2319 page data sets, 
number of 333.0 page data sets 




| 248L 


L 


= 








| 64(M+N+Q) 


M 

N 
Q 


= 


21 if J=8 or 6J - ,5(J(J-1)) if J is less 

than 8 . 

7K - .5(K(K-1) ) 

30 if L is greater than 5, or 12L - 1.5 






I z 


Z 


= 


the size of the fixed SQA (Note 1) . 






| P(456+G) 


P 
G 


= 


number of partitions in the system. 
if SMF is not in system. 






I B 


B 
B 


= 


480 if RTAM is in the system 
if RTAH is not in system. 







Figure 17. Size of the supervisor nucleus (Part 1 of 2) . 



Estimating Total Real Storage 43 



T 1 

Enter Value 



| Calculation 
I 



Description 



R * 128 



A = 

(R - F) * 

F + A 



i 256 



D = 10 84 if real storage size is egual to 
or greater than 192K. 
=0 if real storage size is less than 
192K. 

R = the real storage size (an IPL variable and 
not a system generation variable) .... 

F = SUB TOTAL 

(See Note 2) 

TOTAL SOH (see Note 3) 



Notes: 

1. For additional information refer to section Estimating System Queue Are a 
( SQA) Requirements 

2. The maximum value of A cannot exceed 2040 which is the real storage size 
of 51 OK greater than F. 

3. The total sum of F + A should be rounded up to the next multiple of 2048. 
**• For Plann in g Purposes Only* Represents DSS fixed nucleus storage. 



Figure 17. Size of the supervisor nucleus (Part. 2 of 2). 

Example: For Estimating Fixed Real 
Storage Requirement 

The following example shows how the fixed real storage reguirement was estimated for a 
VS1 configuration consisting of: 

Number of partitions 5 

Virtual storage 3 megabytes 

Real storage - .-V^7/" 5 1 2K ; 

The system contained graphics and teleprocessing support, full SMF facilities, 
standard Fetch, no log, anjL-no multiple console support. A complete description of the 
System/370 configuration; follows: 

• Model 145 with(256K bytes of storage 

• Full MCH and CCH^support 

• FIFO queuing with 75 I/O requests queued on the channels 

• Multiplexor channel with: 

• Two 2540 card reader punches 

• Two 1403 printers with the Universal Character Set Feature 

• One 3215 Console 

• One 1287 OCR Device 

• One 2260 Display Station 

• One 2740 communications terminal (one telecommunications line group with one line) 

• One Selector channel with: 

• Three 8 drive 2319 Disk Storage Units with FEATURE=SHARED 

• A second Selector channel with: 

• Nine 2401 magnetic tape drives 

Control Program options: (includes supervisor and scheduler options) 

• NODDR, NODDRSYS 



44 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Resident Type 3 and 4 SVCs 

Time slicing facility 

System Queue Area of 12K 

Trace Table with 500 entries 

BTAM 

ISAM 

TRSVCTBL 

GRAPHICS (no GSP) 

Five User added SVC routines 

Full SMF 

ESV and EVA 

No LOG or MCS 



Example (calculated from Figures 13, 14, 15, and 17) 



Basic constant 59,500 

More, than one partition . . . 2,7Q0 

Sum of options selected (Figure 13) 

Time Slicing 432 bytes 

500 Trace tabie entries 500(18) 9000 bytes 

BTAM 186 bytes 

ISAM 168 bytes 

GRAPHICS 6 00 bytes 

Eight User added SVC routines 8(24). . . 192 bytes 

Four Type 1»s and 2's 4(4) 16 bytes 

Four Type 3»s and 4«s with TRSVCTBL 4(6) 24 bytes 

SHF=F0LL . . . 2300 bytes 

Total Sum of options from Figure 13 . ... 12,918 

Sum of I/O Channel Options (Figure 14) 

• Multiplexor channel 60 bytes 

• Two selector channels 2(50) 100 bytes 

• One channel path with direct access 

devices (SHARED DASD) 10 bytes 

• 75 I/O requests 75(20) 1500. bytes 

Total Sum of options from Figure 14 ... . 1,700 

Sum of I/O Device Options (Figure 15) 

Seven unit record devices 7(56) 392 bytes 

Two 1403 printers with DCS 2(64) .... 128 bytes 

One optical character reader 54 bytes 

One display device 56 bytes 

Graphics capability. 206 bytes 

Telecommunications capability 62 bytes 

One line group 20 bytes 

One line 58 bytes 

Magnetic tape capability (ESV+EVA) ... 124 bytes ' 

Nine 2400 magnetic tape drives 9(102). . 918 bytes 

Direct access capability INCLUDED 

24 IBM 2314 disks 24(234). . 5616 bytes 

SHARED 2314 support. 492. bytes 

Total Sum of options from Figure 15.... 8,132 

Three megabytes virtual storage(3072K*16K) 192 bytes 

One SVCLIB extent 64+16 80 bytes 

One LINKLIB extent 16 bytes 

Model 145. . . 288 bytes 

51 2K real storage size (2048-3 60). . . . 1688 bytes 

One 2314 page data set 124-6(64) .... 508 bytes 

12K System Queue Area 12288 bytes 

5 partitions with SMF 5(556) . . ... . 2780 bytes 

Real storage greater than 192K 10 84 bytes 

512K real storage (256K*128) ;..... 4096 bytes 



Estimating Total Real Storage 45 



Sub Total 107,970 

A = (524, 288-107, 970)* 256 1626 bytes 

Total Sum for Figure 17 109,596 

Round up factor to make 
I requirement a multiple of 2K 96 

Fixed real storage requirement 
| for Supervisor Nucleus . 110,592 bytes 



Example: For Estimating the Fixed 
SQA Requirement 

The fixed system queue area (SQA) is used by system tasks. It is located in real storage 
just above the nucleus (see Figure 12). The amount of SQA is originally allocated during 
IPL. For a real storage size of 128K, a UK SQA must be specified at system generation or 
IPL time. It is recommended that an additional 2K of SQA be specified for each 
additional 64K block of real storage up to a maximum of 16K for a real storage size of 
512K. VS1 dynamically allocates additional pages to the SQA (anywhere within real 
storage) as needed if the initial specified value is insufficient.. These additional 
pages allocated dynamically to the SQA become unavailable for subsequent paging. Figure 
18 is an aid to calculating the total fixed SQA space required at any time (see Figure 
12, SQA and SQA extended) . The total fixed SQA includes the initial SQA value specified 
at system generation or IPL. 



46 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Calculation 



Description 

A = 16 for each active printer/keyboard 

console. 
=28 for each active composite 

console. 
= 300 if a printer/keyboard is used as 

one-half of a composite console. 
B = the number of active or pending 

commands. 
C = the number of active partitions . . . . 
D = the total of all classes defined for 

all partitions 

E = the number of consoles in the system. 
F = the number of active I/O requests. 
G = the number of concurrently active 

input/output streams, where G is equal 

to or greater than 1 

J = the number of JES buffers defined in 

JESPARMS member of SYS1.PARMLIB . . . . 

R = the maximum number of system readers 
defined in JESPARMS member of 
SYS1.PARMLIB .-..-' 

W = the maximum number of system writers 
defined in JESPARMS member of 
SYS1.PARMLIB 

P = maximum number of partitions. 

K = 2 if SYSLOG is present; otherwise K=0. 

T = the number of 2314/2319 SYS1.SYSPOOL 

tracks. 
= the number of 3330/2305-2 SYS1.SYSPOOL 

tracks. 

Q = the size of real storage 
S = the size of the pageable control 
program calculated in Figure 6. 

V = if SMF is not system generated. 
= 148 if SMF is system generated 

TOTAL SUM THIS CHART (see Note 2) . . . 



Enter Value 



18 0B 

720C 
12D 

32E 

448F 

248G 



12J 



-z. 



32 (R+W+P+K+4) 



45+.075T+.125U 



(Q+S) 



1024 



Note: 

1. This calculation assumes the default value of 28,672 bytes for ALCONIT 
(allocation unit). If a value other .than the default is specified for 
ALCONIT in the JESPARMS member of SYS1 .PARMLIB, see the Formula for Spool 
Cylinder M ap Size under System Spool Data S e t (SYS1. SYSPOOH FOR THE 
COMPUTATION REQUIRED TO DEVELOP THIS VALUE.- 

2. VS1 dynamically allocates additional pages to SQA as needed if the 
estimate from this calculation is insufficient. Whenever additional 
pages are allocated to SQA, they become unavailable for paging. This 
total is rounded up to nearest multiple of 2K. 



Figure 18. Total system Queue Area requirement. 



Estimating Total Real Storage 47 



Estimating System Queue Area (SQA) 
Requirements 

The following example shows how the total SQA requirement was calculated for the same VS1 
configuration as described in the preceding section. 

IAt the time the example was formulated, there were a total of 10 active or pending 
Commands, 2 active partitions, 7 active I/O requests. There were 1000 2314/2319 
SIS1.SYSP00L tracks in the system. 

The total SQA requirement is dynamic and pages are allocated by the system as they are 
needed. Therefore, except for the initial requirement specified at system generation or 
IPL time (a part of the Supervisor nucleus requirement) , the total SQA requirement is not 
necessarily contiguous in real storage. Once SQA space has been extended, the pages 
remain fixed for the duration of the IPL. 

| Example (calculated from Figure 18) 

One active printer/keyboard console .... 160 bytes 

10 active or pending commands 10(180) . . . 1800 bytes 

Two active partitions 2(72 0) 14 40 bytes 

7 classes defined for all partitions 7(12). 84 bytes 

One console 32 bytes 

7 active I/O requests 7(44 8) . . 3136 bytes 

4 concurrently active I/O streams 

(2 readers, 2 writers) 4(248) 992 bytes 

23 JES buffers 12(23) 276 bytes 

32(2+2+5+0+4) = 13(32)) 4 16 bytes 

1000 2314/2319 STSPOOL tracks 

45+. 075 (1000) . 120 bytes 

(Q+S)*1024 = 

(524,288+524, 288)f 1024 1024 bytes 

SHF 148 bytes 

Total sum from Figure 15 9,628 bytes 

Round up factor to make the requirement 
I a multiple of 2K 612 bytes 

Total fixed real storage requirement 

| for the System Queue Area 10,240 bytes 



Estimating Fixed PQA 

The fixed Protected Queue Area (PQA) requirement for each partition is: 

500 + V + W 
Where: 

V = number of K-bytes (1024) of virtual storaqe in each partition. 

W = if FETCH=PCI was not specified in the CTRLPEOG macro during system generation, 

= 1600 if FETCH=PCI was specified. 

The result of the preceding calculation is rounded up to the next multiple of 2048. 

If RTAM is in the system, an additional 2K fixed PQA is allocated for the RTAH 
pseudo-partition. 

48 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Processing Program Fixed Storage 
Requirement 

In addition to the short duration fixed storage requirements for I/O (channel programs 
and control blocks) required by processing programs running in a virtual environment, 
there are long term fixed requirements for some processing programs. These long term 
fixed requirements are listed in Figure 19. Some of these programs require VIRTUAL=REAL 
storage. 



| IBM Programs 



| Fixed Storage 
■+■ 



-i 1 

|V=E 



Generalized Trace 
(Note 1) 



a minimum of 22K (for I NO 

mode=INT) or 36K (for | 

mode=EXT) plus the options | 

selected | 



OLTEP 



4K (minimum) to 32K (maximum) |No 



Recovery Management 
MCH, CCH for CPDs 
with less than 192K 



6K 



I 

| NO 



Note 1. For additional information, refer to OS/VS Service Aids 
GC28-0633. 



Figure 19. Processing program fixed storage requirements. 
I Calculating Available V=R Space for Jobs Run V=R 



The formula for calculating the amount of V=R space available at system initialization 
time is: 

V=R- (A+B+C + D + E) 

Where: 

A = the size of the resident nucleus in bytes (Figure 17) and includes storage 

required for SQA and RMS. 
B = the amount of fixed PQjf required per partition. 
C = the fixed storage requirement for JES at I PL time rounded to next 2K multiple. 

2772+96 x(number of spool volumes) 
D = 4K+ (32K- (M-R)) where M=real storage size. 
E = the size of the fixed control program options (the sum of D, E 2 , F 2 , and G in 

Figure 6) . 
R = the V=R upper boundary. R is equal to the value specified at system 

initialization; otherwise, R = lesser of 512K or real storage size. 

Example: 

For a 128K system (1 partition, minimum I/O configuration, and no extra options) : 

A = 66K (includes 6K RMS and ^K SQA) 
B = 2K 
C = UK 
D = 36K 
E = OK 
108K 

V = 128K - 108K or 20K bytes 

Thus, 20K is the maximum amount of V=R space available to the user at initialization 
time. At some later time this space may not be available because of pages permanently 
fixed within this 20K area. 



Estimating Total Real Storage 49 



Real Storage Requirement During 
System Initialization 

To calculate real storage requirements for system initialization use Figure 20 



i r -,-.— ... ...... ■ -, .. .. , 

| Calculation | Description I Enter Values | 
i i if 


| .... | | y 

| S | S = the size of the supervisor nucleus j | 


| P | P = the sum of (Enter Values Column) for j | 
| | items A,E 3 , F a , and G in I I 
| | Figure 6. II 

| D | D = Enter Values Column for item D in j I 
| | Figure 6 if BLDLF was specified; I I 
| | otherwise, D=0. I I 




| I | I = initialization variable - one of the | I 
| | following: | I 
| | Single user Mult. | I 
j | Partition User | I 
1 1 , Part. | | 
| | ftlnfrfdi system without MCS 26K 48K | I 
| | ho^mkl system with MCS 28K 50K | I 

| | TOTAL SUM THIS CHART (see Note 1) .... | I 
I " ' 1 


| Note: I 
| 1. Round total up to the next multiple of 2048. | 



Figure 20. Real storage requirement for system initialization. 

Conversational Remote Job Entry 
(CRJE) Partition Requirement 

CRJE allows remote access to VS1 from conversational terminals. The terminal user may 
prepare and update programs and data r submit them for processing, and receive the output 
at the terminal. CRJE jobs are processed concurrently with jobs submitted in a batched 
environment. 

Figure 21 can help you to calculate the partition size necessary to run CRJE. Add 2K 
(for fixed PQA) to the partition size calculated and round up to the next multiple of 
64K. 



50 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



PARTITION = 54248 + AA' + 388B + 922C + (820) D + 104E + (1376 + F) + 

32H + 32J + 16K +L + M + N+0 + P +R+ 768T + + V + W 



Where: 



A 
A« 



number of line groups. 

52 if device I/O modules are resident. 

332 if the device is a 1050 and the I/O modules are not 

resident. 

300 if the device is a 2740 with checking and the I/O 

modules are not resident. 

212 if the device is a 2741 and the I/O modules are not 

resident. 

number of lines. 

number of active users. 

number of users receiving job output at one time. 

number of START RDR's pending. 

maximum blocksize of an OS data set to be EDITed. 

number of active users projected to be in syntax checker 

mode at one time. 

number of active users projected to be using EXEC command 

at same time. 

number of active users projected to be using TABSET at 

the same time. 

syntax checker reguirements. 

FORTRAN = (16384) 

19456>+ 192 
.21504) 

Where: 16384 bytes are reguired if the E level syntax 
table, only, is to be resident. 

19456 bytes are reguired if the G and H level 
syntax table is to be resident. 

21504 bytes are reguired if both the E level, and 
the G and H level syntax checkers are to be 
resident. 

PL/I = (17408) 

<21504>+ 300 (PLINO) 
(28672) 

Where: 17408 bytes are reguired for the resident 
restricted checker. 

21504 bytes are reguired for checking with 
partial dynamic structure. 

28672 bytes are reguired for checking with fully 
dynamic structure. 

PLINO is the maximum number of PL/I statement 
lines allowed under CRJE. 

Note: If both checkers are selected, include 
(3 00 PLINO) . 



Figure 21. Partition reguirement for CRJE (Part 1 of 2) . 



Estimating Total Real Storage 51 



M = if BTAM is fully resident or 6000 if BTAH is not 

resident. 
N = size of user LOGON exit routine if included in CRJE. 
= size of user LOGOFF exit routine if it is included in 

CRJE. 
P = size of user JOBCARD exit routine if it is included in 

CRJE. 
Q = size of user specified command processors included in 

CRJE. 
R = if BTAM On-line Test is not included. 

= 2128 if BTAM On-line Test is included. 
T = number of BTAM transmission codes used. 
= if the RAM list of modules is resident. 

= 1800 if the RAM list of modules is not resident. 
V = 952 if one or more 1050»s on a leased line with Timeout 

Suppression feature are supported. 
= if no 1050's with Timeout suppression are supported. 
W = if CRJE transient area is not larger than 

the minimum of 8K. 

2048xN where N is the number of additional 2-K 

blocks to be added to the transient area. 



Figure 21. Partition reguirement for CRJE (Part 2 of 2) . 



52 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Access Method Storage 



Basic Indexed Sequential Access 
Method (BISAM) 

The virtual storage requirement for retrieving or storing a data set with the basic 
indexed sequential access method (BISAM) is estimated by adding the requirements for: 

• buffer area 

• coding area 

• channel program area 

• control block area 

The buffer area requirement for BISAM is determined by: 

For fixed-length records: Area = N(BLKSIZE +16) + B 

For variable-length records: Area = N(BLKSIZE + J) + B 

Where: 

N = number of buffers. 

B = size of DCB (20 for alignment on a fullword boundary, and 24 for alignment on a 
doubleword boundary) . 

J = 16 if the buffers are aligned on a doubleword boundary, and 12 if the buffers are 
aligned on a fullword boundary. 

If new logical records are not written in a data set (that is, if WRITE KN is not 
used), refer to Figures 22 and 23. If WRITE KN is used, refer to Figures 21 and 22. In 
both cases, use Figure 25. When both WRITE KN and any combination of READ K, READ KN, or 
WRITE K is used, use the total of Figures 20 and 22 for the channel program space 
estimates. 



Without WRITE KN 

Select one or more entries from Figure 22 for each data set stored or retrieved using 
BISAM without HRITE KN. Because these entries represent storage for sharable routines, 
no entry should be added more than once when coding space is calculated for multiple 
data-control blocks open at the same time. 



Access Method Storage 53 



Macro Instruction 
and Type Field 





Write 






| Recorl 


Validity 


Levels of 


Reguirements 


| Format 


Checking 


Indexing 


(bytes) (6) 


j Fixed 


No 


None (1) 


41 04 


I Fixed 


No 


1 or more 
(2) 


4304 


| Fixed 


Yes 


None (1) 


4504 


| Fixed 


Yes 


1 or more 
I (2) I 


4680 


I Var 






4720 



READ K, READ KN r 
or WRITE K 
(3, 4, 5) 



Notes: 

1. Assume only one level of indexing, which is in real storage. 

2. Assume one or more levels of indexing, of which the highest 
level may be in real storage if there are two or more levels. 

3. If dynamic buffering is used, add 648 bytes. 

4. If CHECK macro is used to test for completion of READ or 
WRITE, add 136 bytes. 

5. Add 3408 bytes if any data set resides on rotational position | 
sensing devices (2305, 3330) . 

6. Subtract 648 bytes if running virtual=real. 

i i 

Figure 22. Coding space estimate for BIS AM without WRITE KN. 

Select one entry from Figure 23 for each data set stored or retrieved using BISAM 
without WRITE KN. 



1 — — I — - - - — -■■- ■ - - 1 

I Levels of Indexing | I 
| Searched on Device | Storage Reguirement (in bytes) | 
i i t 


l ... I j 

| None | 408M I 
i ■ ■ 


r 


One | 408M + 88 I 

• i 


| Two or more | 408M +192 I 
i ■ i 


r 


Where: I 
M = the value in the NCP field of the data control block. | 


n 


Note: For write validity check, add 128M to the above | 
reguirement. I 



Figure 23. Channel program space estimate for BISAM without WRITE KN. 



54 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



With WRITE KN 

Select one or more entries from Figure 24 for each data set stored or retrieved using 
BISAM with WRITE KN. Because these entries represent storage for sharable routines, no 
entry should be added more than once when the coding space estimate is calculated for 
multiple data-control blocks open at the same time. 



r t— "i v - ' — — ■ 1 

| || | Storage Requirement (in bytes) | 
■ i i J. - i 


i lift r 
| Record | Dser | Write | | WRITE KN With | 
| Format and | Work | Validity | WRITE KN | READ K, READ KN, | 
1 Blocking I Area | Check | Osed Alone | or WRITE K | 


| | | No | 8448 | 11912 | 


| Length | | Yes | 8688 | 12248 | 


| | | No | 8240 | 11704 | 


| | | Yes | 8760 | 12320 | 


| | I No | 8936 | 12400 | 


| Length | | Yes | 9248 | 12808 | 


| | | No | 9344 | 12808 | 


| | | Yes | 10096 | 13656 | 
I ill I I 


1 II I I 1 
| Variable III 1 1 
| Length | Yes | N/A | 10640 | 14656 | 
i iii ^ i 


i 1 

| Note: If any level of index is searched on the device, add 288| 
1 bytes (assumed NSLD=0) . I 

| • Add 648 bytes if dynamic buffering is used. j 

| • Add 136 bytes if the CHECK macro is used to test for | 
| completion of WRITE KN or READ and WRITE K. | 

| • Add 3408 bytes if any data set resides on rotational | 
| position sensing device 2305,3330. I 

| • Subtract 648 bytes if running virtual=real. | 



Figure 24. Coding space estimate for BISAM with WRITE KN. 



Access Method Storage 55 



Select entries from Figure 25 for each data set stored or retrieved using BISAM with 
WRITE KN. 



1 -T ~ - - * ~ 1 

| | Storage Requirement (in bytes) | 


1 r i 1 
| Channel Program Use | Without Write | With Write | 
| | Validity Check | Validity Check | 


| Levels of indexing searched on | 1 1 
| device I 1 1 
j • One | 88 | 88 | 
| • Two or more 1 19 2 | 192 I 


| Fixed-length unblocked records | I I 
| • With user work area I 888 + 40(N-1) | 1208 + 24(N-1) | 
| • Without user work area | 928 j 1248 I 
■ i I \ 


1 111 

| Fixed-length blocked records | I I 
| • With user work area I 904 + 40(N-1) | 1224 + 40(N-1) | 
| • Without user work area | 856 | 1144 | 
i ill 


1 II l 
| Variable length records | 12 72 | 1272 | 
1 s ' 1 


| Where: N = the number of physical records that fit on one track. j 



Figure 2 5. Channel program space estimate for BISAM with WRITE KN. 

Select entries from Figure 26 for each data set stored or retrieved with BISAM, 



i r 1 

| Control Block I Storage Requirement (bytes) | 


| Data control block | 236 | 


| Data event control block | 26W | 


| Input/Output block (Note 1) | 56W | 


| Data extent block I 108+16E+2M=about 170 | 


| Buffer control block for | I 
| dynamic buffering I 24 I 


| Interruption request block | 100 I 
j i i 


i I l 

| Work area (any BISAM DCB) | 120 (Note 2) | 


| Work area for WRITE KN | | 
| (if not supplied by user) | I 
j • Unblocked records | 10 + L + R I 
| • Blocked records | L + R + B I 
i • i 


| Where: | 
| E = the number of extents I 
j M = the number of modules I 
| L = the key length I 
| R = the record length (LRECL) I 
| B = the block size | 
I W = the value in NCP field of data control block | 
| Notes: | 
| 1. Allocate an additional 16W bytes for RPS devices. | 
| 2. Subtract 40 bytes if virtual=real. I 



Figure 26. Control block space estimate for BISAM. 



56 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



BISAM Example 

In this example we read with two channel programs simultaneously and update fixed-length 
unblocked records. One level of indexing is searched on the device. The write validity 
check option is not used. The device is an RPS type and address space is virtual. 

Sharable routines: 

READ K/WRITE K 4512+3408... 7,920 
Two channel programs, 

408(2) + 88 904 

Control blocks: 

Two data-event control 

blocks, 26(2) 52 

Two input/output blocks, 

56 (2) + 16 (2) 144 

Data-control block 236 

Data-extent block 170 

Interruption-request block 100 

Work area 120 

Total.... 9,646 bytes 



Access Method Storage 57 



Graphic Access Method (GAM) 

The virtual storage requirement for the I/O and attention handling operations of the 
graphic support routines can be estimated from Figure 27. No dynamic storage is required 
for buffer management facilities because these are SVC routines and r as such, are 
executed in the SVC transient area. 

i : i 

S = A1 + A2 + B1 + B2 



Where: 

A1 = size of the data control block (DCB) , input/output block 
(IOB) , and data extent block plus 4(N-1) where N=number 
of display units/extent block. 
A2 = size of macro instructions. 
B1 = size of sharable I/O routines. 
B2 = size of sharable interruption handling routines. 



Figura 27. Virtual storage requirement for Graphic Access Method. 
Select one entry from Figure 28 for each type of device used. 



| I/O Device Type 



Storage Requirement (in bytes) 



| 2250 



32X + 52Y + 72Z 



| 2260 

^ 



32X + 52Y + 72Z 



I 

| Where: 

I 

| X = the number of data extent blocks plus 4(N-1) 

| where N=number of display units/extent block. 

| Y = the number of data control blocks. 

| Z = the number of input/output blocks. 



Figure 28. Estimate A1 for Graphic Support. 

Select one or more entries from Figure 29 for each macro instruction used. 



r - t - - ■- ■ — — ■ -— '-i 

| I/O Device Type | Storage Requirement (in bytes) | 


| 2250 | 70H + 60A + 36B + 4D | 
ii i 


| 2260 | 70M + 60A | 
1 ' 1 


| Where: I 

| M = number of input/output macro instructions used. | 
| A = number of attention handling macro instructions | 
| used . I 
j B = number of buffer management macro instructions | 
| used. | 
| D = number of order and data-generation macro | 
| instructions used . I 



Figure 29. Estimate A2 for Graphic Support. 

Select one entry from Figure 30 for the particular device type used. Include this 
estimate only once if both devices are used. 



58 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



1 

| I/O Device Type 
1 


i 1 

Storage Requirement (in bytes) | 


| 2250 
■ 


1,775 | 


| 2260 


1 ,775 | 



Figure 3 0. Estimate B1 for Graphic Support. 

Select one entry from Figure 31 for the particular device type used, 
estimate only once if both devices are used. 



Include this 



| I/O Device Type 



| 2250 



2260 



Storage Requirement (in bytes) | 
1 



1,875 



1 ,875 



Figure 31. Estimate B2 for Graphic Support. 



2250 Example 

An installation employs four 2250 Display Units, Model 3, attached to a 2840 Display 
Control. In the program being considered, the buffer management and attention handling 
facilities are being used with a single display unit. The program includes three 
input/output, two buffer management, and four attention handling macro instructions. 



| S = A1 + A2 + B1 + B2 

¥ 

| A1, control blocks (1 DEB + 1 DCB + 3 IOBs) 300 

| A2, macro instructions 7C(3) + 60(4) + 36(2) 522 

| B1, sharable I/O routines 1,775 

I B2, sharable attention handling routines 1.875 

| Total 4,472 bytes 

L_ 



2260 Example 

An installation employs eight 2260 Display Stations attached to a single 2848 Display 
Control. In the program being considered, four 22 60 Display Stations are associated with 
each of two DCBs. Attention handling is used. The program includes two input/output and 
eight attention handling macro instructions. 



i 

| S = A1 + A2 + B1 + B2 

I 

| A1, control blocks (2 DEBs + 4(N ± -1+N 2 -1) + 2 DCBs + 

| 1 IOB) 320 

| A2 r macro instructions 70(2) + 60(8) 620 

| B1 r sharable I/O routines * 1,775 

| B2, sharable attention handling routines 1 ,875 

| Total 4,590 bytes 

i 



Access Method Storage 59 



Queued Indexed Sequential Access 
Method (OISAM) 

To retrieve or store a data set with the gueued indexed sequential access method, virtual 
storage is the sum of the following reguirements: 

• The buffer area 

• Coding space 

• Channel-program space 

• Control-block space 



Buffer-Area Requirement 



The buffer-area reguirement for QISAM can be determined from Figure 32 



r 

1 

1 


■ — ' - - _ , — 

For creating a data set: | Area = N (BLKSIZE 


+ 8) + 8 


1 
■ 


1 






i 


1 


For scanning a data set with | 
fixed-length blocked | 
records: j Area = N (BLKSIZE 


+ 16) + 8 


i 


1 






i 




For scanning a data set with j 
variable-length blocked | 
records: | Area = N(BLKSIZE 


+ H) + 8 






For scanning a data set with | 
fixed-length unblocked | 
records or variable-length | 
unblocked records when both j 
key and data are to be read: | Area = N (BLKSIZE 


+ G) + 8 


■ 


1 


For scanning a data set with | 
fixed-length unblocked | 
records when only data is to | 
be read: | Area = N (LRECL + 


16) + 8 


i 
i 


1 


Where: 




i 




N = number of buffers. 

G = smallest multiple of 8 egual to, or greater 

KEYLEN + 10. 
H = 16 if buffers are aligned on a doubleword b< 

if buffers are aligned on a fullword boundai 


than, 

Dundary, or 
ry. 


12 | 



Figure 32. QISAM buffer area reguirement. 



60 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Data Set Creation 

To determine the coding space required, select an entry from Figure 33 for each data set 
created with QISAM. Because these entries represent storage for sharable routines, no 
entry should be added more than once when the coding-space estimate is calculated for 
multiple data-control blocks open at the same time. 



Record Format 



Write Validity 
Checking 



Storage Requirement (bytes) 
d, 2) 



Fixed-Length {■ 



Yes 



No 



6464 



6072 



Var. Length 



Yes 



No 



6832 



6376 



Full track 
Index Write {■ 
(fixed only) | 



Yes 



No 



6544 



6104 



Notes: 

1. If any data set resides on a rotational position sensing 
device (2305, 3330), add 1280 bytes. 

2. Subtract 332 bytes if running virtual=real. 



Figure 33. QISAM coding-space estimate for data-set-creation. 
Select one entry from Figure 34 for each data set created. 





_ _, p ,..__._ _ — , 

Description | Storage Requirement (bytes) | 

1 (1, 2) | 


§-■■-■ i ...,., 
| Unblocked records and | I 
1 relative key position zero | 352 + 8N | 


I All other cases | 352 + 24N | 
i i ... i 




Where: | 




N = the number of buffers | 




Note: | 




1. For write validity check, add 144 bytes to the above | 
requirement. | 




2. Add 232 bytes to the above requirement of the last | 
track if the track index also contains data (that is, | 
if it is a shared track) . | 



Figure 34. QISAM channel program space estimate for data-set-creation. 



Access Method Storage 61 



Select entries from Figure 35 for each data set created with QISAM. 



Control Block 



| Storage Requirement (bytes) 



One data-control block 



236 



Data extent block 



| 92 + 16E + 2M = about144 
H 



Work Area (1) 



744 + 4N + 2L 



Where: 

E = the number of extents 
M = the number of modules 
H = the number of buffers 
1 = the key length 

Note: 

1. Subtract 32 bytes if running virtual=real. 



Figure 35. QISAM control-block space estimate for data set creation, 



Data Set Scanning 

Select entries from Figure 36 for each data set referred to in the scan mode of QISAM. 
Because these entries represent storage for sharable routines, no entry should be added 
more than once when the coding space estimate is calculated for multiple 
data- control-blocks open at the same time. 



Description 



| Storage Requirement (bytes) 



Variable-Length 
Format 



Fixed-Length 
Format 



Reading a data set 



4808 



4672 



Reading and updating a 
data set: 

• Without write validity 
check 

• With write validity 
check 



5152 
5664 



5016 
5528 



The starting point for sequential reference may be expressed as 
I, B, or K. There are additional storage requirements if the 
starting point for sequential reference is expressed as either 
I or K: 

• If it is I, add 680 bytes. 

• If it is K, add 2144 bytes. 

If any data set resides on a rotational position sensinq device 
(2305, 3330), add 928 bytes. 

Subtract 168 bytes if running virtual=real . 

i 

Figure 3 6. QISAM coding space estimate for data set scanning. 



62 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Select one or more entries from Figure 37 for each data set referred to in the scan 
mode of QISAM. 



r — " ■ - - ■ -"■ - — .-_,. — -— , 

| Description | Storage Reguirement (bytes) | 
i i i 


i i , ... . i | 
| Primary reguirement | 72 + 56H | 
j i i 


i i I 

| Add the following if | I 
| reguired: j | 
| • Setting limit by I | 104 | 
| • Setting limit by K | 37 | 
i ■ i 


i I 

| Where: | 
| N = the number of buffers used. I 



Figure 37. QISAM channel- program space estimate for data set scanning. 

Select entries from Figure 38 for each data set referred to in the scan mode of QISAM. 



1 1 1 

I Control Block 1 Storage Reguirement | 
1 1 (bytes) | 
i i i 


i i i 
| Work Area (1, 2) | 456 I 
j i i 


j i i 

| One data-control block | 236 I 


| Data extent block (3) | 1 48+1 6E+2M=mini mum of 172 | 


| Interruption reguest block | 100 I 


I Where: | 
| E = the number of extents | 
| M = the number of modules | 
| Notes: (select only one) | 
| 1. Subtract 32 bytes if running virtual=real. | 
| 2. Subtract 118 bytes if virtual=real and the data set| 
| does not reside on a rotational position sensing | 
| device (2305 r 3330). I 
j 3. Without RPS and V=R. | 



Figure 38. QISAM control block space estimate for 
data set scanning. 



QISAM Example 

A data set is created with two channel programs, two buffers, and fixed-length records 
with a key length of 12 bytes. The write-validity-check option is not used, and 
virtual=real. 

Sharable routines: 

Primary reguirement 6072-232.. 5840 
Channel programs: 

Fixed-length records, 

352 + 24(2) + 232.. 632 

Control blocks: 

Data-control block 23 6 

Data-extent block 144 

Work area, 

744 + 4x2 + 12x2 -32 744 

Total.. 7,596 bytes 



Access Method Storage 63 



Basic Telecommunications Access 
Method (BTAM) 

The virtual storage requirement for retrieving or storing a data set with the basic 
telecommunications access method (BTAM) is estimated by summing the following 
requirements: 

• coding-space area 

• control-block area 

• control-information area 

• control-block area by lines 

• channel-program area by lines 

The coding-space estimate (Figure 39) includes the BTAM code required to support the 
READ, WRITE, REQBUF, and RELBUF macro instructions, and dynamic buffer allocation. This 
code is sharable across line groups and is not duplicated for multiple data control 
blocks open at the same time. 



r — i 
| Description 1 
■ ■ 


i 1 

Remote Requirement 


— i 
Local 3270 Requirement | 


I ..... . l 

| Primary requirement: 






| • without buffer management 


8550 


4000 | 


| • with buffer pool support 






| (REQBUF and RELBUF) j 


8950 


4450 | 


1 • with dynamic buffering 


10164 I 


(Not applicable) | 


| Optional requirement: 






| • online test 


2880 


660 | 


| • if ONLTST macro is used 


464 


(Not applicable) | 


| • line-error print (LERPRT) 


374 


(Not applicable) | 


| • line open (LOPEN) 


530 


530 | 


| • translate (TRNSLATE) 


158 


(Not applicable) | 


| • change or local 3270 entry 






| for Auto (CHGNTRY) 


352 


72 | 


| • if RESETPL macro is used 






| with POLLING specified 


256 


(Not applicable) | 


| • if RESETPL macro is used 






| with ATTENT specified 


(Not applicable) 


| 200 | 


| • if RESETPL macro is used 


| 600 


600 | 


| without operands 






| • World Trade Telegraph 






| terminals 


| 1108 


(Not applicable) | 


| • change entry for expanded 






| ID verification (CHGNTRY) 


| 38 


| (Not applicable) | 


| • edit routine TPEDIT, 






| IECTEDIT 


I 2048 


| (Not applicable) | 



Figure 39. BTAM coding-space estimate. 



64 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Select the appropriate entry from Figure 40 for each type of terminal to be supported 
under BTAM. 



Terminal Device 



IBM 1030 Data Collection System 



IBM 1030 Data Communication System with 
Auto Poll 



IBM 10 50 Data Communication System 



IBM 1050 Data Communication System on a 
switched network 



IBM 1050 Data Communication System with 
Auto Poll 



IBM 1060 Data Communication System 



IBM 1060 Data Communication System with 
Auto Poll 



IBM 2260 Display Unit attached as a 
remote terminal with a 2701 adapter 



IBM 2740 Communication Terminal 



IBM 2740 Communication Terminal with 
checking 



IBM 2740 Communication Terminal with 
checking and OIU (Optical Image) 



IBM 2740 Communication Terminal with 
station control 



IBM 2740 Communication Terminal with 
station control and checking 



IBM 2740 Communication Terminal on a 
switched network 



IBM 2740 Communication Terminal with 
checking on a switched network 



t 1 

Virtual storage 

Requirement 

(bytes) 



224 



224 



238 



312 



204 



192 



200 



292 



146 



268 



262 



152 



216 



172 



270 



Figure 40. BTAM control-information space estimate by device type (Part 1 of 2) 



Access Method Storage 65 



r - ■ ■ ■- — ■ ■ '■■- - -- t •"■ — 1 

| | Virtual Storage | 
| Terminal Device j Requirement | 
| | (bytes) | 
i ii 


I I l 

| IBM 2740 Communication Terminal with | I 
| transmit control on switched network | 186 | 
i i i 


I I i 

| IBM 2740 Communication Terminal with | | 
| checking and OIU on a switched | | 
| network I 330 j 
i it 


1 ii 

| IBM 2740 Communication Terminal with | | 
|: transmit control and checking on a | | 
| switched network | 270 | 


| IBM 274 Communication Terminal with | | 
| station control, checking, and Auto | I 
| Poll | 214 | 
i if 


1 It 

I IBM 2740 Communication Terminal with | I 
| station control and Auto Poll | 150 | 

L 1 1 


\ if 

| IBM 2741 Communication Terminal | 106 | 
i ii 


i i l 

| IBM 2741 Communication Terminal on a | | 
| switched network | 138 | 
j i i 


■ I 1 
| IBM 3277 Display Station Local I 135 | 
i i i 


l 1 i 

| IBM BSC Terminal on a nonswitched, | I 
| point-to-point network I 282 | 
i if 


I I i 
| IBM BSC Terminal on switched network | 424 | 
i ii 


1 1 l 
| IBM BSC Terminal on a nonswitched | I 
I multipoint network | 328 | 
i 1 1 


| AT&T Model 33/3 5 TWX stations | 170 | 
i ii 


I II 

| AT&T 83B3 Selective Calling Stations | 146 | 
i ii 


l 1 ..,._., ,. ^ 

| Western Onion Plan 1 1 5A Outstation | 138 | 
i ii 


t 1 ( 

| World Trade Telegraph Terminals | 158 | 



Figure 40. BTAM control-information space estimate by device 
type (Part 2 of 2) . 

Ose the control blocks in Figure 41 for each line group. 



r - - ■ ' ■ - ■ - -— ■■ — i 


i — ■" — -\ 

Remote 


1 


— i 




Virtual Storage 


| Local 3270 Virtual 




| Control Block 


Requirement 


Storaqe Requirement 






(bytes) 


(bytes) 


i 


| Data control block 




56 


1 


| • with binary synchronous communications 


84 






| • without synchronous communications 


56 






| Data extent block 


104-120+4 per line 


| 56+4 per device 




| Interruption request block 


(Not applicable) 


124 




| Interruption queue element 


(Not applicable) 


24 





Figure 41. BTAM control block space for each line group. 



66 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Use the control blocks in Figure 42 for each line, 
entries. 



Select and total the appropriate 





"" 1 


, , 

Remote 
Virtual Storage 


i — 

Local 3270 Virtual 


— i 




Control Block 


Requirement 


Storage Requirement 








(bytes) 


bytes 


■ 


r 


Data event control block 

• with binary synchronous communications 

• without synchronous communications 


48 
40 


40 


■■ i 




Input/output block with 4 CCHs minimum 


1 96 


1 96 






Unit control block 


| 20 


20 






Line error block (LERB macro instruction) 


20 


(Not applicable) 





Figure 42. BTAH control block space for each line. 



Access Method Storage 67 



Select entries from Figure 43 for each line according to its device type. 



Terminal Device Type 



Virtual Storage 

Requirement 

(bytes) 



IBM 1030 Data Collection System 
IBM 1030 Data Collection System (P) 
IBM 1050 Data Communications System 
IBM 1050 Data Communications System (P) 
IBM 1050 Data Communications System (A,D) 
IBM 1060 Data Communications System 
IBM 1060 Data Communications System (P) 
IBM 2740 Communications Terminal 
IBM 2740 Communications Terminal (C) 
IBM 2740 Communications Terminal (C,0) 
IBM 2740 Communications Terminal (A) 
IBM 2740 Communications Terminal (D) 
IBM 2740 Communications Terminal (A r C) 
IBM 2740 Communications Terminal (D,C) 
IBM 2740 Communications Terminal (D,C,0) 
IBM 2740 Communications Terminal (A,D,T) 
IBM 2740 Communications Terminal (A,D r T r C) 
IBM 2740 Communications Terminal (S) 
IBM 2740 Communications Terminal (S,P) 
IBM 2740 Communications Terminal (S,C) 
IBM 2740 Communications Terminal (S,C,P) 
IBM 2741 Communications Terminal 
IBM 2741 Communications Terminal (A) 
IBM 3277 Display Station (Local) 
IBM BSC Terminal on a nonswitched 

point-to-point network 
IBM BSC Terminal on a switched network 
IBM BSC Terminal on a nonswitched 

multipoint network 
IBM 2260 Display Unit (R) 
AT&T 83B3 Selective Calling Stations 
AT&T Model 33/35 Teletypewriter Exchange 

terminal using the eight- bit Data 

Interchange Code (A) 
AT&T Model 33/35 Teletypewriter Exchange 

Terminal using the eight-bit Data 

Interchange Code (D) 
Western Union Plan 115A Outstations 
World Trade Telegraph Terminals 



64 
88 
64 
80 
88 
56 
80 
40 
48 
64 
48 
56 
48 
64 
64 
64 
64 
56 
88 
64 
88 
48 
48 
24 

72 

80 

88 
64 
48 



56 



56 
40 
40 



Where: 

A = Automatic answering 

C = Checking 

D = Dialing (automatic calling) 

P = Auto Poll 

R = Remote attachment with an IBM 2701 Type III Adapter 

S = Station control 

T = Transmit control 

= IBM 2760 Optical Image Unit 



Figure 43. BTAM channel program space estimate by device type 
per line. 



68 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Figure 44 contains the storage requirement for 
code-translation tables (AHSTBTAB) per device type. 



Description 



Virtual Storage 

Requirement 

(bytes) 



Input Translation (transmission code to 
EBCDIC) 



256 



Output Translation (EBCDIC to transmission 
code) 



256 



Figure 44. Storage requirement for code-translation tables 
for BTAM. 



BTAM Example 



This example shows how to estimate the dynamic storage 
required by a telecommunications application with Auto Poll 
and buffer pool support but without dynamic buffering and 
binary synchronous communications. 

Assume a VS1 configuration of: 

One line with three IBM 1050 Data Communication System 
Terminals and one line with two of these same terminals. 

Basic system information: 

• one line group 

• start-stop error recovery procedures 

• translation 

• one DECB per line 

BTAM coding-space estimate (8950+158+352) 9460 

Control-information space by device type 204 

Control-block space estimate for one line group.... 56 

Control-block space estimate for two lines 224 

Channel- program space for two lines..... 160 

Translation tables for input and output (256x2) .... 512 

Total 10616 bytes 



Access Method Storage 69 



Sequential Access Methods 
(BSAM and QSAM) 

The virtual storage requirement for retrieving or storing a 
data set with the basic sequential or queued sequential access 
method (BSAM or QSAM) can be estimated from Figure 45. 

■ ~ * 

I S = Aj. + A 2 + B ± + B 2 + B 3 + B 4 + C + buffers + record area 

I 

Where: 

A-l = size of the data control block (DCB) and, for BSAM, the 
data event control blocks (DECBs) . 

A 2 = size of input/output blocks (IOBs) , data extent blocks 
(DEBs) and channel programs. (Assume one 
extent in each DEB.) 

B x = size of sharable, directly entered routines for macro 
instructions. 

B a = size of sharable, indirectly entered routines for macro 
instructions. 

B 3 = size of sharable interruption handling routines. 

B^ = size of sharable error recovery routines for QSAM. 

C = SIO appendage size for jobs operating in a virtual=real 
mode. 

buffers = storage required for the input and output buffers and 
eguals P+8+ (4»B0FN0)+ (BUFNO-BLKSIZE) , where P=8 if record 
area is present for QSAM; otherwise, P=0. 

record area = storage required for the assembly and segmenting 
of a spanned record and eguals: 
for QSAM = 32 + LRECL when the DCB specifies: BFTEK = A, 

RECFM = VS or VBS, and locate mode, 
for BSAM = 12 plus the smaller of the track capacity or 
blocksize when the DCB specifies: BFTEK = R, 
RECFH = VS r and MACRF = WL. 
|. 

| Note: For dummy data sets, S = K ± + B ± , where B ± = 104 bytes. 

i ', 

Figure 45. Virtual storage requirement for BSAM, QSAM. 

Estimates A 2 , B x , B 2 , B 3 , and B^represent storage that 
remains allocated only while the data control block is open 
(unless it is used concurrently with another data control 
block) . Estimate h x includes storage that normally remains 
allocated for the duration of a job step. 

Use Figures 46 through 56 to calculate estimates A lr A 2 and 
B ± through B for each data set to be retrieved or stored with 
BSAM or QSAM. Add together the entries in each table that 
correspond to the attributes of the data set. 



70 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Select one entry from Figure 46 for each data set stored or 
retrieved with BSAM. 



r- 


I/O Device Type 


| Storage 
I (in 


— . , 

Reguirement | 
bytes) | 


i 


Card reader, card punch, printer, or TSO 
terminal 




72 


+ 


20n | 


|- 


Paper tape 




80 


+ 


20n | 




Optical character readers (1285/1287/1288) 




88 


+ 


20n | 




1419 Magnetic character reader 




88 


+ 


20n | 




1275 Optical reader sorter 




88 


+ 


20n | 




Magnetic tape or direct access storage 




88 


+ 


20n | 


■ 


Direct access storage 

(Create BDAM spanned record format) 


• 


88 


+ 


24n | 


1 


Where: 

n = the number of data control blocks, that 
channel programs (when the data control 
OPDAT, n > 2) . 


is, the number of | 
block is open for | 



Figure 46. Estimate A ± for BSAM. 

Select one entry from Figure 47 for each data set stored or retrieved with QSAM, 



1 1 —I 

| | Storage Reguirement | 
| I/O Device Type | (in bytes) | 


| Dnit record, or TSO terminal j 80 | 
i ii 


| Magnetic tape I 96 | 


| Direct access storage I 96 | 


I i i 
| Optical character readers (1285/1287/1288) | 96 | 

L _ - .-_.__ —X. -J 



Figure 47. Estimate A ± for QSAM. 



Access Method Storage 71 



Select one entry from Figure 4 8 for each data set stored or retrieved with either BSAM 
or QSAM. If BSAM is used to create a direct data set for use with BDAM, use Figure 50. 



r - 


I/O Device Type 


-i —i 

| Data 

| Control | 
| Block | 
| open for 


1 

Storage Reguirement (in bytes) | 


■ 


i 

Normal 
Scheduling 


Chained | 
Scheduling | 


r 


Card reader 


| INPDT | 


120 + 48n 


120 + 48 + 56n | 


i 


Paper tape reader 


| INPDT 


120 + 48n 


N/A | 


r 
i 


Card read-punch (BSAM) 


| INOUT | 


120 + 64n 


N/A | 


r 


Printer or punch 


| OUTPUT 


120 + 56n I 


120 + 48 + 64n | 




Magnetic reader (1419) 


| INPUT | 


120 + 522 + 28n 


N/A | 




Optical sorter (1275) 


| INPUT 


120 + 522 + 28n | 


N/A | 




Optical Character 
Readers 


I INPUT | 
| (BSAM) 


160 


N/A | 


i 


| INPUT 
I (QSAM) 


120 + n(48 + 16r) 


N/A | 


l 


Direct access 


| UPDAT 
| (BSAM) 

1 


132 + s + n(120 + 
relevant options) 
See Note 






1 

| UPDAT 
1 (QSAM) 


132 + s + n (128 + 
relevant options) 


i 




| INPUT 
I (non- 
| fixed 
| standard) 
1 


132 + s + n(88 + 
relevant options) 
See Note 


1 
132+80+s+n(64+ | 
relevant options) | 




i 

| INPUT 
| (fixed 
| standard) 


132 + s + n (72 + 
relevant options) 
See Note 


132+80+s+n(64+ | 
| relevant options) | 




| OUTPUT 
i 


132 + s + n (88 + 
relevant options) 


132+80+s+n(88+ | 
I relevant options) | 




I 

| INOUT 
| OUTIN 
| (BSAM) 


132 + s + n (128 + 
relevant options) 
| See Note. 


132+80+s+n(112+ | 
| relevant options) | 


i 


| INPUT 
| (OFFSET 
| READ) 


132 + s + n (88 + 
relevant options) 


I N/A | 
I 1 


I 
1 


SYSIN/SYSODT 


1 Any 


168 + 412 


1 N/A | 



Figure 48. Estimate A 2 for BSAM and QSAM (Part 1 of 2) 



72 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



I/O Device Type 



Data 
Control 
Block 
open for 



Storage Requirement (in bytes) 



Normal 
Scheduling 



Chained 
Scheduling 



Magnetic tape (BSAM) 



INOUT 
OUTIN 



120 + 56n 



120 + 48 + 64n 



Magnetic tape 



INPUT 
RDBACK 



120 + n(48 + 
relevant options) 



120 + 48 + 56n 



OUTPUT 



120 + n(48 + 
relevant options) 



120 + 48 + 64n 



Where relevant, include in the above storage requirements: 

(exchange buffering, record overflow, and Chained scheduling 
are mutually exclusive) 



Option 



Storage Requirement (in bytes) 



Record overflow (not UPDAT) 



48 (t - 1) 



Write validity check 



24 (32 if record overflow but not UPDAT) 



Exchange buffering 



8b - 8 



Search Direct (not RPS) 



Direct access RPS device 



2 4 (16 if Chained scheduling) 



Where: 

n = the number of channel programs for BSAM, or the number of buffers for 

QSAM. (For chained scheduling n > 2) . 
r = the number of lines read (BUFL/LRECL) . 
s = for non-RPS device, 8 for RPS device, or 1 6 for RPS device and chained 

scheduling, 
t = the number of tracks that a record may occupy, 
b = the blocking factor for blocked, fixed-length records. (b = 1 when a 

unit record device is specified) . 



Note: If record overflow is used and the data control blocks opened for 
UPDAT, INPUT, INOUT, or OUTIN, add 96 bytes. 



Figure 48. Estimate A a for BSAM and QSAM (Part 2 of 2) . 



Access Method Storage 73 



T 1 : ' 

Record Format I Storage Requirement (in bytes) 



Option 



Without record overflow 



132+s+n (128+3S) 



a or V 



132+s+n (160+4s) 



With record overflow 



F, a, or V 



132+s+n (128+80t+5s+2st) 



Write validity check 
without record overflow 



132+s+n (176+5S) 



or V 



132+s+n (18U + 6s) 



Write validity check 
with record overflow 



F, 0, or V 



132+s+n (160+96t+6s+2st) 



Where: 

n = the number of channel programs. 

t = the number of tracks that a record may occupy. 

s = 8 for device with RPS and not RECFM=DT r otherwise, s 



= 0, 



Figure 49. Estimate A 2 for BSAM when creating a Direct Data Set, 



74 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Select one or more entries from Figure 50 for each data set stored or retrieved with 
BSAM. Because these entries represent storage for sharable routines, no entry should be 
added more than once when estimate B ± is calculated for multiple data control blocks open 
at the same time. 



1 — - 


:tion 


— r — i 

1 I/O Device Type i 


r 1 

Data 
Control 
Block 
Open for 


r - - - — l 

Storage Requirement | 
(in bytes) j 


| Hacro Instruc 


i 
Normal | 
Scheduling | 


Chained j 
Scheduling | 


| READ/WRITE 




| Unit record, 

| magnetic tape, or 

| direct access 


INPUT 

OUTPUT 

INOUT 

RDBACK 

OUTIN 


424 | 


424 | 




| Direct access 


UPDAT 


392 | 


N/A | 




| SYSIN/SYSOUT 


Any 


1992 | 


N/A | 






| Paper tape 
i 


INPUT 
(trans- 
late) 


512 | 


N/A | 


| READ 


i 

| Optical Reader 
■ 


INPUT 


136 | 


N/A | 


i 


i 

| Magnetic Reader 
| (1419/1275) 


INPUT 


176 | 


N/A | 


| READ (offset 

| of a spanned 

| data set) 
j 


READ 
direct 


j Direct access 


INPUT 


152 | 


N/A | 


j 

| CHECK 




| Unit record, 
| magnetic tape, 
| direct access, or 
| SYSIN 

i 


INPUT 

OUTPUT 

INOUT 

RDBACK 

INOUT 


392 | 


392 | 


I 

| Direct access 


UPDAT 


| 112 | 


N/A | 
I 




| Paper tape 
i 


INPUT 


| 240 | 


1 

N/A | 




I 

| Optical Reader 


INPUT 


818 | 


N/A | 




| Magnetic Reader 

| (1419/1275) 
i 


INPUT 


I 416 | 


N/A | 




1 

| SYSOUT 


Any 


I I 




N/A | 



Figure 50. Estimate B* for BSAM (Part 1 of 3) . 



Access Method Storage 75 



, 


-l 1 

| I/O Device Type 
i i 


1 1 

Data 
Control 
Block 
Open for 


— , 

Storage Reguirement | 
(in bytes) | 


I Macro Instruction 


"'" T 

Normal | 
Scheduling | 

„.„ ,_ _. ,.. i . 


Chained j 
Scheduling | 


1 CHECK (Creating a 
| direct data set) 


i 

| Direct access 


OUTPUT 


200 | 


N/A | 


j CHECK (Creating a 
| direct data set with 
| VS format) 


| Direct access 


OUTPUT 


360 | 


N/A | 




I Magnetic tape 
i 


Any 


496 | 


N/A | 




i 

| Card reader 
i 


INPUT 


168 | 


N/A | 


| CNTRL 


i 

| Printer 


OUTPUT 


168 | 


N/A | 


1 Optical Reader 
i 


INPUT 


864 | 


N/A | 


i 


i 

| Magnetic Reader 
| (1419/1275) 


INPUT 


440 | 


N/A | 


l 


| Magnetic tape 
■ 


INPUT 

OUTPUT 

INOUT 

RDBACK 

OUTIN 


368 | 


272 | 


| NOTE/POINT 


i 

I Direct access 
I without record 
| overflow 


INPUT 
OUTPUT 
INOUT 
OUTIN 


368 | 


440 | 


I Direct access 
| without record 
| overflow 
i 


UPDAT 


440 | 


N/A | 




i 

I Direct access 
I with record 
1 overflow 
i 


Any 


440 | 


N/A | 




| SYSIN/S7S0UT 


Any 


| 


N/A | 



Figure 5 0. Estimate B x for BSAM (Part 2 of 3) . 



76 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



r ■ i 1 1 - —i 

| | | | Storage Requirement | 
j II Data | (in bytes) j 


| Macro Instruction | I/O Device Type j Block j Normal | Chained j 
| j j Open for | Scheduling | Scheduling | 
i i iiii 


i i ii i l 
| WRITE (creating a | I I | | 
| direct data set | Direct access | OOTPOT | 784 | N/A | 
j with F format) j I II 1 
■ ■ ii i i 


■ I i i i i 
| WRITE (creating a | II 1 1 
I direct data set | Direct access I OOTPUT | 856 | N/A | 
j with or V format) | II 1 1 


l 1 iiii 
| WRITE (creating a | I | I 1 
j direct data set | Direct access | OOTPOT | 1288 | N/A | 
| with record overflow) | III I 
i i i ii i 


l l ill i 

I WRITE (creating a | II 1 1 
1 direct data set with j Direct access | OOTPOT j 1960 | N/A | 

1 Vl ■€ nrrifn + TWPV'K-sT} ' i ■ I ■ 


| must be specified) | II 1 1 
1 1 1 II 1 


| DSPLY | Optical Reader | INPOT | 472 | N/A | 


| RESCN | Optical Reader | INPOT | 592 | N/A | 

1 L .. L L - L 1 



Figure 50. Estimate B± for BSAH (Part 3 of 3) . 



Access Hethod Storage 77 



For each data set stored or retrieved with QSAM, select one item either from Figure 51 
if simple buffering is used or from Figure 52 if exchange buffering is used. Because 
these entries represent storage for sharable routines, no entry should be added more than 
once when estimate B x is calculated for multiple data control blocks open at the same 
time. 



r- 


Macro 


. ! 

Instruction 


i — 
Mode 


; l - -i 

I Record | 
| Format | 


'■ •' "' " i 
Storage | 
Requirement | 
(in bytes) j 




GET 




Locate 


I F or 


160 | 




1 V | 
i i 


168 | 




I i 

I V spanned 


232 | 




I V spanned | 
1 (logical | 
I record | 
I interface) 
i i 


608 | 




Move 


i i 

I F or 

■ 


288 | 




i 

I V or D 

i i 


264 | 




i i 

I V spanned 
i 


448 | 


■ 


| Data 


i 

I V spanned | 


464 | 


r 


GET 


(reading backwards for 
magnetic tape) 


| Locate 
i 


| F or 


160 | 




l 

I Move 


| F or 


280 | 




GET 


(with CNTRL for 
card reader) 


| Move 


| F or 


144 | 




GET 


(with PUTX function) 


| Data control 
j block open 
| for UP DAT 


|F, 0, or V 


! 488 | 




I V spanned 
| (logical 
| record 
| interface) 
1 


1952 | 




GET 


(paper tape translate) 


| Move 


I F or 


1 752 | 



Figure 51. Estimate B^. for QSAM (Simple buffering) (Part 1 of 2) 



78 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



i ■■ 'T : ■ — ~ r - "" ~ ~i 1 

| Macro Instruction | Mode | Record | Storage | 
I I | Format | Requirement | 
I | | | (in bytes) | 


1 1 | F or U | 128 | 


| is desired, add 168) | I V | 312 | 
I i i i i 


i i t I i 
I | | V spanned | 296 | 
I i i .. i i 


I I r 11 

| 1 1 V spanned | | 
1 I j (logical | 952 | 
I | | record | | 
| | | interface) | | 
i iiii 


1 1 !_..,, | j 
| POT (includes PDTX function; | | F or D | 224 | 


| is desired, add 168) | | V | 344 | 
i i ill 


i I |. ....... | | 

| I | V spanned | 560 | 

1 U — II , , 1 


i r — I ii 

I | Data | V spanned | 560 | 
I iiii 


i ill! 
| GET (for Optical Readers) | | F | 312 | 


| | | V or | 408 | 


I I I F | 376 | 


| | | V or | 456 | 
i i i i i 


i l l ll 
| PUT/GET (SYSIN/SYSOUT) | Any | any | 1208 | 
i i ii i 


i I 111 

| CNTRL (for Optical Readers) | N/A | N/A | 864 | 
i iiii 


I l 111 
| RDLINE(for Optical Readers) | N/A | N/A | 232 | 
1 ' ' ' 1 


| Note: Each GET macro instruction includes the corresponding RELSE macro | 
| instruction; each POT macro instruction includes the corresponding TRUNC | 
| macro instruction. I 



Figure 51. Estimate B^ for QSAM (Simple buffering) (Part 2 of 2). 



Access Method Storage 79 



1 - 1" ■ - ■ T — 1 1 

| Macro Instruction | Mode I Record | Storage | 
| II Format | Requirement | 
1 III (in bytes) | 
1 1 I'll 


1 1 1 F, r or V | 104 | 


| | | F blocked | 144 | 


| | | F or | 88 1 


| | | F blocked | 184 | 
i till 


1 III! 
| PUT (includes POTX I | F, U, or V | 336 | 


| for printer is j j F blocked | 288 j 


| | I F or | 330 | 


| | I F blocked | 288 | 
1 ' ' ' 1 


| Note: Each GET macro instruction includes the corresponding RELSE macro | 
| instruction; each POT macro instruction includes the corresponding TRONC | 
| macro instruction. I 



Figure 52. Estimate B t for QSAH (Exchange Buffering). 



80 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Select one or more entries from either Figure 53 (without user totaling) or Figure 54 

(with user totaling) for each data set stored or retrieved with either BSAM or QSAM. 

Because these entries represent storage for sharable routines, no entry should be added 

more than once when estimate B2 is calculated for multiple data control blocks open at 
the same time. 



, -. _ _ _ . _ 1 _.,, ., ..., .... .. . 7 .-.,.. _ _ ._. .,._ , 

| I | Storage Requirement | 
1 1 1 (in bytes) | 


| 1 Open for | Normal | Chained | 
| | | Scheduling | Scheduling j 
i i ill 


1 l III 

| Card punch or printer (with | III 
| hardware control character I OUTPUT | 136 | 184 | 
| or no control character) | III 
i i ill 


1 i ill 

| Card punch or printer (with | II 1 
| ASA control character) | OUTPUT | 256 | 344 | 


| Card reader I INPUT | 480 | 624 | 
t i ill 


1 l ill 
| Paper tape reader | INPUT I 480 | N/A | 
1 1 III 


| Magnetic Reader (1419/1275) | INPUT | 336 | N/A | 


| Optical Readers | INPUT I 254 | N/A | 


| SYSIN/SYSOUT | ANY | 1448 | N/A | 


| Magnetic tape I INPUT, OUTPUT, | 480 | 624 | 
| | INOUT, or OUTIN | | | 


| | RDBACK | 480 | N/A | 
I I ill 


1 1 III 
| Magnetic Tape or direct | INOUT or OUTIN and | | | 
| access without track | LABEL= (, , ,IN) or | 528 | 672 | 
| overflow | LABEL=(, , ,OUT) | | I 
| | specified on the DD card | | 1 
i i ill 


I — I i i i 
| Direct access without | UPDAT I 480 | N/A | 


| | INPUT not RECFM=FS | 480 | 624 | 


| | INPUT RECFM=FS | 62 4 | 624 | 
■ i . I l 1 


1 r I I 1 

| | OUTPUT | 62 4 | 976 | 


| | INOUT or OUTIN | 1104 | 1600 | 
i i ill 


1 1 ill 
| Direct access with track | INPUT I 480 | N/A | 


| | OUTPUT or UPDAT | 1048 | N/A | 


| | INOUT ot OUTIN | 152 8 | N/A | 


| | OUTIN; and | | I 
| | LABEL=(,,,OUT) | 1096 | N/A | 
| | specified on the DD card | | | 
■ 1 _. ill 


1 r "ill 

| | INOUT; and | I I 
| | LABEL=(, r ,IN) | 530 | N/A | 
| | specified on the DD card | | | 



Figure 53. Estimate B a for BSAM and QSAM (without user totaling) 



Access Method Storage 81 



I/O Device Type 



Data Control Block 
Open for 



Storage Requirement 
(in bytes) 



Normal 
Scheduling 



Chained 
Scheduling 



Magnetic tape 



OUTPUT, OUTIN, 
or INOUT 



240 



OUTIN and 
LABEL=(,,,OUT) 
specified on the DD card 



288 



440 



488 



Direct access without 
track overflow 



OUTPUT 



632 



INOUT or OUTIN 



872 



OUTIN and 
LABEL=(,,,0UT) 
specified on the DD card 



680 



1000 



1440 



1048 



Direct access with track 
overflow 



OUTPUT 



1056 



INOUT or OUTIN 



1536 



OUTIN and 
LABEL=(,,,OUT) 
specified on the DD card 



1104 



N/A 



N/A 



N/A 



Add for user totaling: 



t(n+1) + 120 + 48 



Where: 

t = 2 + length of user's totaling area rounded to halfword. 

n = number of channel programs for BSAM or number of buffers for QSAM. 



Note: For chained scheduling n must be equal or greater than 2. 



Figure 54. Estimate B a for BSAM and QSAM (with user totaling). 

Select one or more entries from Figure 55 for each data set stored or retrieved with 
either BSAM or QSAM. An entry must be selected if all attributes listed for that entry 
apply to the data set, no matter how many entries apply. Because these entries represent 
storage for sharable routines, no entry should be added more than once when estimate B 3 
is calculated for multiple data control blocks open at the same time. 



82 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



r 

| Scheduling 
■ 


T 


— , 

I/O Device Type 

i 


r - 1 

Data Control Block | 

Open for | 

i 


. — , 

Record 
Format | 


- ■■" - — i 

Storage | 
Requirement | 


i 




i 
Any | 


i 

INPOT, OOTPOT, | 
INOOT, OOTIN 


Any | 


1752 | 


| Chained 


3211 printer 


OOTPOT | 


Any 


184 | 




Direct access I 


INPOT, INOOT, 


OOTIN 


Any 


216 | 

■ 




h 

h 

h 

1 
I 


Any except 
Paper tape, 
search direct; 
paper tape, 
SYSIN/SYSOOT; or 
DOS Chkpnt tapes 


INPOT,INOOT, | 
OOTIN, OPDAT 


Blocked F | 
including 

standard 

- 


1 

272 | 
1 i 




INPOT, INOOT, 
OOTIN, OPDAT 


V 


584 | 
■ i 




Direct access 
with track 
overflow 


INPOT, INOOT, 
OOTIN, OPDAT 


Any 


1 ■■-" ■ 1 

344 | 
I i 




Direct access 
with track over- 
flow and RPS 


INPOT, INOOT, 
OOTIN, OPDAT 





l 1 

| 248 | 




Direct access 


OPDAT (QSAM only) 


Any 


232 | 




Direct access 


OPDAT (QSAM only) 


Any 


1 152 | 


| Normal 


Direct access 


OPDAT 


Any 


496 | 




Direct access 
search direct 


INPOT, INOOT, 


OOTIN 


Any 
(except FS, 
FBT,OT,VS, 
or VBS) 


| 304 | 




Direct access 
Search direct 


INPOT, INOOT, 


OOTIfJ 


Any 
| (except FS, 
FBT,OT,VS, 
or VBS) 


272 | 




Direct access 
search direct 


INPOT, INOOT, 


OOTIN 


Any 
(except FS, 
FBT,OT,VS, 
or VBS) 


448 | 




Direct access 
not search 
direct 


INPOT, INOOT, 


OOTIN 


Any 
(except 
standard 

F) 


128 | 




Direct access 
with record 
overflow and not 
search direct 


INPOT, INOOT, 


OOTIN 


I Any 
| (except 
| standard 
I F) 


| 184 | 




Non-3211 printer 


OOTPOT 


Any 


64 | 




3211 printer 


OOTPOT 


Any 
I- 


| 184 | 


■ 


SYSIN/SYSOOT 


Any (See Note) 


1 

Any 


I 

• 


Figure 55. 


Estimate B 3 for BSAM 


, , . 

and QSAM (Part 


1 of 2] 







Access Method Storage 83 



Scheduling 



I/O Device Type 



Data Control Block 
Open for 



Record 
Format 



i 1 

Storage 
Reguirement 



Normal 



Magnetic reader 
(1419/1275) 



Paper tape 



Paper tape 



Direct access 
(creating a 
direct data set) 



Direct access 
(offset READ of 
direct data set) 



Magnetic tape 
with DOS check 
point records 



Magnetic tape 
with DOS check 
point records 



INPUT 



INPDT 



INPUT 



OUTPUT 



INPUT 



INPUT 



INPUT 



Any 



F or U 



Translate 
tables 
for ASCII 

or 
Burroughs 



Translate 
tables 
for IBM, 
Teletype, 
NCR, or 
Friden 



VS 
(BFTEK=R) 



VS 
(BFTEK=R) 



F or U 



3616 



24 



512 



768 



184 



328 



416 



424 



Note: If SYSIN/SYSOUT no other entry can be choosen. 



Figure 55. Estimate B 3 for BSAM and QSAM (Part 2 of 2) . 



1 


1 — — - i 


I Data Control Block Open For 


I Storage Requirement (in bytes) | 


i 


i ,, ■ 


i 


l — ■*" — 1 


| INPUT 


| 384 | 


| OUTPUT 


1 256 | 


| OPDAT 


1 584 | 


| UPDAT (logical record interface 


| 856 | 


| spanned records) 





Figure 56. Estimate B for QSAM. 



84 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



BSAM Example 

Fixed-length blocked records are read from one tape and written on another. The CHECK 
macro instruction and normal scheduling are used. This example does not use totaling or 
contain DOS checkpoint records. 

i " • ' ' 1 

| S = k ± + A a + Bj. + B a + B 3 + buffers | 

i , 1 . i ■ 

A lr DCB and DECB: 

INPUT from tape, 88 + 20(2) 128 

OUTPUT to tape, 88 + 20(2) .. 128 

A 2 , Channel programs, DEB, and 106: 

INPUT from tape, normal scheduling, 120+2(48)...... 216 

OUTPUT to tape, normal scheduling, 120+2(48) 216 

Bi, Sharable directly entered routines 

READ/WRITE........ 424 

CHECK 392 

B a , Sharable indirectly entered routines: 

Magnetic tape 480 

B 3 , Sharable interruption routine: 

Normal scheduling, fixed-length blocked records.... 272 

Total 2256 bytes + buffers 

OSAM Example 

Fixed-length blocked records are read from magnetic tape and written to another tape. 
Move mode and normal scheduling are used. 

I : ' : " : ' : * 1 

| S = Ai + A 2 + Bi + B a + B 3 + B h + buffers | 

I '. ; ; '. : I - . 

Ai, Control blocks: 

INPUT from tape 96 

OUTPUT to tape 96 

A a , Channel programs, DEB, and IOB: 

INPUT from tape, normal scheduling, 120+2(48)...... 216 

OUTPUT to tape, normal scheduling, 120+2(48).. 216 

Bj., Sharable directly entered routines: 

GET, move mode, simple buffering 288 

PUT, move mode, simple buffering 224 

B a , Sharable indirectly entered routines: 

Magnetic tape 480 

B 3 , Sharable interruption routines: 

Normal scheduling, fixed-length blocked records.... 272 

B^, Sharable error routines: 

INPUT 384 

OUTPUT... 256 

Total. 2528 bytes + buffers 



Access Method Storage 85 



Basic Direct Access Method (BDAM) 

The virtual storage requirement for retrieving or storing a data set with BDAM can be 
estimated from Figure 57. 



| S = A ± + A 2 + Bj. + B 2 + B 3 + Bjj + B 5 + Segment area for VRE 



Rhere: 

A ± = size of the data control block (DCB) , data event control 
blocks (DECBs), data extent block (DEB) and interruption 
request blocks (IRB) . 

A 2 = size of input/output blocks (IOBs) , and channel 
programs. 

Bj. = size of sharable routines for addressing method. 

B 2 = size of sharable routines for macro instructions. 

B 3 = size of sharable routines for options. 

Bij = size of dynamic buffering areas. 

B 5 = 3680 for VRE, 1680 otherwise. 

Segment area = the smaller of the track capacity or the 
maximum record size. 



Figure 57. Virtual storage requirement for BDAM. 

Select entries from Figure 58 for each data set stored or retrieved with BDAM. 



i — ' 1 

Storage Requirement (in bytes) 



Control Block 



Data control block 



104 



Data Control block 



68+(16+T) E (Note 1) 



Each data event control block 



28 for Non-VRE 
32 for VRE 



Interruption request block 



96 



Note 



E = the number of extents 

T = 12 for fixed length records with relative block 

addressing and track overflow. 
T = H for fixed length records with relative block addressing 

without track overflow. 
T = for all other cases 



Figure 5 8. Estimate Aj. for BDAM. 



86 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Select one entry from Figure 59 for each read or write operation. 



Macro Instruction 
and 
Type Field 



Without Extended 
Search or Write 
Validity Check 
Options 
non-VRE VRE 



Storage Reguirement (in bytes) (1,2) 

T 



Additional 
Bytes With 
Write Validity 
Option 
non-VRE VRE 



Additional 
Bytes With 
Extended 
Search Option 
non-VRE VRE 



READ I 



112 



120(3) 



N/A 



N/A 



N/A 



N/A 



READ K 



112 



120(4) 



N/A 



N/A 



64 



96 



WRITE I 



112 



128 



24 



40 



N/A 



N/A 



WRITE K 



112 



128 



24 



24 



64 



88 



WRITE A 
(record format F) 



144 



N/A 



24 



N/A 



80 



N/A 



WRITE A 

(record format 
or V) 



168 



272 



32 



48 



Notes: 

1. If the dynamic buffering option is included, add 16 bytes for each 
data control block and include the total size (in bytes) of all 
buffer areas. 

2. If the read exclusive option is used, add 80 bytes for each data 
control block. 

3. If "next address" is reguested, add 32 bytes. 

4. If "next address" is reguested, add 40 bytes. 



Figure 59. Estimate A 2 for BDAM. 

Select one entry from Figure 60 for each data set stored or retrieved with BDAM. 

Because these entries represent storage for sharable routines, no entry should be added 

more than once when estimate B ± is calculated for multiple data control blocks open at 
the same time. 



| Addressing Method 

I 

I- 



Storage Reguirement (in bytes) 



Without Feedback Option 



1 

With Feedback Option | 
1 



| Relative block 



296 



480 



| Relative block 

j with track overflow 

h 



696 



936 



| Relative track 



272 



272 



I Actual 



Figure 60. Estimate B^ for BDAM. 



Access Method Storage 87 



Select one or more entries from Figure 61 for each data set stored or retrieved with 

BDAM. Because these entries represent storage for sharable routines, no entry should be 

added more than once when estimate B 2 is calculated for multiple data control blocks open 
at the same time. 



1 


Type Field 
of 
Macro Instruction 




— i 

| Storage 


Reguirement 


[in bytes 


l 
) 1 




| Without 
| Search 
j non-VRE 


■ 
Extended 
Option 

VRE 


With Extended | 
Search Option | 
non-VRE VRE | 




I 




| 360 




792(1) 


N/A 




N/A | 




K 




| 216 




792(1) 


608 




1184 | 




A (Record format F) 




| 360 




N/A 


592 




N/A | 


1 


A (Record format or 


V) 


| 768 




1472 


976 




1680 | 
■ 


r 


Note: 

1. This number should 
used. 


be 


used only once 


if types 


I and 


K 


1 

are beingl 



Figure 61. Estimate B 2 for BDAM. 

Select one or more entries from Figure 62 for each data set stored or retrieved with 
BDAM. Because- these entries represent storage for sharable routines, no entry should be 
added more than once when estimate B 3 is calculated for multiple data control blocks open 
at the same time. 



I 


— i — T 
Option | Storage Reguirement (in bytes) | 


r 


Write validity check | 392 | 


H i i 
| Read exclusive | 928 | 


r 


Extended search | 184 | 

i . i 


\~ ........ ... ., . _ , 

| CHECK macro instruction | 240 | 
i_ ■ ,i 


r 


i 




Note: Add 232 bytes once to the total estimate if one or| 
more of the following apply: | 




• Type field of macro instruction is A and record format | 




is U or V. | 




• Dynamic buffering. I 




• Read exclusive. | 



Figure 62. Estimate B 3 for BDAM. 



88 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Select one entry only from Figure 63 for each DCB if dynamic buffering has been 
specified. 



, ,. „ , . , . — , , „ , 

Type of Address | Storage Reguirements (in bytes) 
Space | 1 



| Non-VRE 



VRE 



REAL 



| 336 
H 



| 376 



VIRTUAL 



| 1176 + 8 (d-b) | 1216+8 (d-b) 

_i i 



Where: 

b = number of buffers specified. 

d = maximum number of dynamic buffers in use. 

(Dynamic buffering READs not offset by FREEDBUF 
or dynamic buffering WRITES.) 



Figure 63. Estimate B^ for BDAM - Dynamic Buffering 
Only. 



BDAM Example 

Read with one channel program and write with another channel program using relative track 
addressing, validity checking, and key type operations. The extended search, feedback, 
and dynamic buffering options are not used. 



| S = A ± + A a + Bi + B a + B 3 + Bj 



Constant 1680 

A A , Control blocks: 

Data control block 88 

Data extent block 112 

Two data event control blocks, 28 (2) 56 

Interruption reguest block 96 

A 2 , Channel programs: 

READ K without extended search option 112 

WRITE K with validity check option 136 

B ± , Addressing method: 

Relative track without feedback option 272 

B a , Macro instructions: 

Type K without extended search option 216 

B 3 , Options: 

Write validity check........ 392 

Bi+, Dynamic Buffering 

Constant 1680 

Total 3160 bytes 



Access Method Storage 89 



Basic Partitioned Access Method 
(BPAM) 

The virtual storage requirement for retrieving or storing a data set with the basic 
partitioned access method (BPAM) can be estimated from Figure 64. All estimates for BPAM 
are calculated from the tables used for BSAM. 



1 s = 

1 


= A ± + 


!V a + B ± + B 2 


+ B 3 + buffers 








1 

I Where: 














1 hi 


= size 


of 


data control block. 








1 Aa 


= size 
and 


of input/output blocks (IOBs) , 
channel programs. 


data extent 


blocks 


(DEBs) , | 


1 B± 


= size of sharable, 
instructions (and 


directly entered 
include NOTE and 


routines for 
POINT macro 


macro | 
Instructions) . | 


1 B a 


= size of sharable, 
instructions. 


indirectly entered routines f< 


3r macro 




1 B 3 


= size 


of 


sharable 


interruption handling routines 






| buffers = 


size of inpu 


t and output buffers. 







Figure 64. Virtual storage requirement for BPAM. 

Estimates A 2 , B ir B 2 , and B 3 include storage that remains allocated only while the 
data control block is open (unless it is used concurrently with another data control 
block) . Estimate A t includes storage that normally remains allocated for the duration of 
a job step. 

Because BPAM uses the same sharable routines as BSAM, storage requirements for 
sharable routines should not be duplicated when estimates B ± , B 2 , and B 3 are calculated 
for multiple data control blocks open at the same time. 

BPAM Example 

One member with fixed-length blocked records (not standard F) is read. Two buffers and 
the CHECK, NOTE, and POINT macro instructions are used. 

, ' 1 

| S = A ± + A 2 + B*. + B 2 + B 3 + buffers | 

i i 

A ir Control blocks: 

Direct access, INPUT, 88 + 20(2) 128 

A 2 , Channel programs, 132 + 88(2) 308 

B ± , Sharable directly entered routines: 

READ/WRITE, INPUT 424 

CHECK 392 

NOTE/POINT 368 

B 2 , Sharable indirectly entered routines: 

INPUT.. 480 

B 3 , Sharable interruption routines: 

Normal scheduling, fixed-length blocked records.... 272 

Normal scheduling, any record format except 

standard F 128 

Total 2400 bytes + buffers 



90 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Telecommunications Access Method 
(TCAM) 

You can estimate the virtual storage requirement for TCAM by using the following formulas 
for the message- control requirements and the message-processing requirements. 



Message Control Program 

Figure 65 shows the virtual storage requirement for the message-control program. 



S = M+L+C + P + (A+B) (K+12) + + OC 



Where: 

L = the size of the message-control modules (see 

Figure 67) . 
C = the size of the control blocks and information (see 

Figure 68) . 
P = the size of the channel programs, translation 

tables, and special character tables (see 

Figure 69) . 
A = the value of the MSUNITS operand on the INTRO macro. 
B = the value of the LNUNITS operand on the INTRO macro. 
K = the value of the KEYLEN operand on the INTRO macro. 

Round the quantity (K+12) up to the nearest 8 byte 

boundary before usinq in formula. 
= the size of the selected TCAM options (see 

Figure 70) . 
0C= Operator Control = 4096 bytes. 
M = the size of the message handler 

macro expansion (see Figure 66) . 



| Figure 65. Storage requirement for the message-control program. 

Use Figures 66-70 to calculate the storage requirements for M r L, C, P, and in 
Figure 65. The storage calculated in Figures 66-7 should be rounded up to the nearest 
multiple of 2048 bytes. 



Access Method Storage 91 



1 - , 1 

1 1 

1 


Storage Reguirements (in 


1 

bytes) | 


1 1 
I Macro Instruction . i 


• i 
First use | Each subseguent | 
of macro | use of macro | 


| CANCELMG 

|. LEVEL=BLK I 

| with a mask 


12 | 8 
12 | 8 
12 | 8 


i 


| CHECKPT I 


8 | 4 




| CODE | 

| with tablename operand, in 

| INHDR group I 

| with tablename operand, not 

1 in INHDR group 

| with no operand, in INHDR I 

| group 

| with no operand, not in | 

| INHDR group I 


60 | 52 
22 | 18 
56 | 48 
18 | 14 




| COUNTER 


18 | 14 




| "CTBFORM | 

| with no operand 

| with option field | 

| without option field and with 

| »ENDCHAR=NO» and »DVCID=NO» 


20 | 16 
22 I 18 

18 | 14 




| CUTOFF 


18 | 14 




| DATETIME 


38 | 30 




| .ERRORMSG 

j with 'EXIT* operand 


28+c | 20+c 
32+c | 24+c 




| ERRSET 


16 | 16 




| FORWARD 

| with 'EXIT 1 operand 

| with , DEST=PUT I operand 


26+c | 22+c 
34+c | 30+c 
20 | 20 




| HOLD 

| with •INTVL' operand 


12 | 8 
16 | 12 




| INBLOCK 


| 




| INHDR 

| with 'PATH 1 operand 


28 | 24 

I 60 | 52 




| INBUF 

| with 'PATH 1 operand 


I o 
28 | 28 




1 | 

| INEND 

| with no •INHSG' macro or 

| with'INMSG* macro that 

| uses 'PATH* operand 


I 2 | 2 
| 22 | 22 




| INHDR 

| with 'PATH 1 operand 


| 12 | 12 
| 44 | 40 





| Figure 66. Estimate M for TCAM Message Control Program (Part 1 of 4) . 



92 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



1 


1 

1 

l 


1 

Storage Reguirements (in bytes) | 

i 


| Macro Instruction 


i i 

First use | Each subsequent | 
of macro | use of macro | 


| INITIATE 

| with characters operand 




16 | 16 | 
52+ c | 52 +c J 


| INMSG 

| with •PATH' operand 




8 | 8 | 
36 | 36 | 


| LOCK 

| with characters operand 




16 | 12 | 
44+c | 40+c | 


| LOCOPT 




14 | 14 | 


| LOG 

| in INHDR, INBUF, OUTHDR, or 

| ODTBOF in INMSG or OOTMSG 


18 | 14 | 
12 | 8 | 


| MSGEDIT 

| in INBLOCK 

I with characters operand 

| in outgoing group; 

| in outgoing group with 

| characters operand 

| in INBDF with length operand 


28 | 14 | 

62 | 42 | 

34+c | 20+c | 

| 32 | 14 | 

38+c | 20+c | 
36 | 18 | 


| MSGFORM 

| with 'BLOCK* or 'SUBBLCK' 

| with •BLOCK* and 'SUBBLCK* 

| with »BLOCK* and 'SENDTRP* 

| in OUTHDR group 

| with 'ENDCHAR* and "COUNT* 

| in INBLOCK with character 

| in INBLOCK with character 

I string and option field 


operand 
operand 

operands 
string 


16 | 12 | 

18 | 14 | 

19 | 15 | 
22 | 18 | 
26 | 14 | 

| 18 | 14 | 
42 | 26 | 

50 | 30 | 


| MSGGEN 

| with the fieldname operand 
1 with the 'CODE' operand 
| with fieldname and 'CODE' 


operands 


| 13+c | 9+c | 
16 | 12 | 
17+c | 13+c | 
20 | 16 | 


| MSGLIMIT 

| with integer operand 

1 with opfield operand 




20 | 16 | 
46 | 42 | 


| MSGTYPE 

| with characters operand 




4 I 4 | 
36+c | 36+c | 


| ORIGIN 




20 | 16 | 


| OUTBUF 

| with 'PATH' operand 




I | 
28 | 28 | 


| OUTEND 

| with no 'OUTMSG' macro or 
| 'OUTMSG' macro that uses ' 
| operand 


with 
PATH • 


2 | 2 | 
12 | 12 | 

14 | 14 | 


| OUTHDR 

| with *PATH' operand 




12 | 12 | 
40 | 40 | 



I — . — — I.....I, . . . II I, . ., I ■ -- I ...-. M 

| Figure 66. Estimate M for TCAM Message Control Program (Part 2 of 4). 



Access Method Storage 93 



r " - ■■ — - - ~ —i 

1 1 
l 


i — 1 

Storage Requirements (in bytes) | 

• 


1 

| Macro Instruction 


■ i 
First use | Each subsequent | 




of macro | use of macro | 


| OUTMSG 


16 | 12 | 


| with 'PATH 1 operand 


54 | 54 | 


| with CTBFORM and no MSGFORM | 


22 | 14 | 


| With CTBFORM and MSGFORM with | 




| « ENDCHAR* operand 


42 | 22 | 


| with CTBFORM and MSGFORM I 




| without •ENDCHAR" 


30 | 14 | 


| with MSGFORM and 'ENDCHAR" | 




| without CTBFORM 1 


3 6 | 20 | 


| with MSGFORM without 




| CTBFORM and « ENDCHAR « 1 


32 | 16 | 


| PATH 


24 | 24 | 


| with characters operand 


60+c | 60+c | 


| PRIORITY | 


40 | 40 | 


| with characters operand 


56+c | 56+c | 


| QACTION 


22 | 18 | 


| RETRY 


8 I 4 | 


| RFDIRECT (4) 


I 12 | 8 | 


| with mask operand 1 


16 | 12 | 


| SCREEN 


16 | 12 | 


| with characters operand 


52+c | 48+c | 


| SEQUENCE 




1 in INHDR group 


36 | 32 | 


| in OUTHDR group 


16 | 12 | 


| SETEOF 


8 | 8 | 


j with characters operand 


44+c | 44+c | 


| SETEOM 


56+c | 32+c | 


| SFTSCAN 


14 | 14 | 


| with characters operand 


23+c | 19+c | 


| STARTMH 


38 | 18 | 


| with «LC=O0T , # »STOP=YES« 


I 38 | 18 | 


| with option field 


50 | 22 | 


| TERRSET 


| 16 | 16 | 


| TGOTO 


| 24 | 18 | 


| UNLOCK 


| 16 | 12 | 


| with characters operand 


| 44+c | 40+c | 



| Figure 66. Estimate M for TCAM Message Control Program (Part 3 of 4) 



94 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Rhere: 

c = the number of characters coded in the character string operand of 
the macro. 

Notes: 

1. If the REDIRECT macro is coded before ERPOPMSG, 4 bytes can be 
subtracted from this value. 

2. If the MSGFORM macro is coded before MSGEDIT, 8 bytes can be 
subtracted from this value; if MSGEDIT is in an outgoing group, 4 
additional bytes can be subtracted. 

3. If the MSGEDIT macro is coded before HSGFORM, 8 bytes can be 
subtracted from this value; if the MSGEDIT, DATETIME, ERRORMSG or 
SEQUENCE macros were coded in an outgoing group before MSGFORM, 4 
more bytes can be subtracted from this value. 

4. If the ERRORMSG macro is coded before REDIRECT, 4 bytes can be 
subtracted from this value. 



Figure 66. Estimate M for TCAM Message Control Program (Part 4 of 4) . 



Access Method Storage 95 



Select entries from the following figure. Each entry should be included only once 
regardless of the number of times the associated option is used in the Message Control 
Program. More than one entry may be included for one macro depending upon the operands 
coded. One entry may also encompass more than one macro. If more than one entry applies 
to a particular macro whose size is being determined, add the storage reguirement for 
each applicable entry to determine the total number of bytes reguired for the macro. 



t 1 

Storage 
Reguirement 
(in bytes) 



Option 



Non-optional modules I 12097 

CANCELMG macro coded with LEVEL=MSG I 166 

coded with LEVEL=BLK | 786 

CHECKPT macro coded I 85 

CODE macro coded in any group | 336 

coded only in INHDR group (additional) | 130 

COUNTER macro coded I 105 

CTBFORM macro coded I 2568 

COTOFF macro coded I 520 

DATETIME macro coded I 235 

DATETIME, ERRORMSG, MSGEDIT, or MSGFORM macros for any | 380 

group or SEQUENCE macro for outgoing group only | 

ERRORMSG macro coded I 420 

ERRORMSG or REDIRECT macro coded | 290 

FORWARD macro coded with any operands I 690 

coded without DEST=PUT (additional) | 230 

coded with FOA specified (additional) | 524 

HOLD macro coded I 1520 

LOCK macro coded I 150 

LOG macro coded in either INHDR, INBUF, OUTHDR, or OUTBUF | 220 

groups | 

coded in either INMSG or OUTMSG (additional) | 690 

MSGEDIT macro coded with any operands I 848 

macro coded for any insert operation I 2032 

coded for remove operation using I 

an offset (additional) I 1168 

coded for insert operation using | 

an offset (additional) I 308 

coded for insert operation using a | 

count (additional) I 424 

MSGEDIT or MSGFORM coded in INBLOCK (additional) | 339 

MSGFORM macro coded with ENDCHAR, SUBBLCK, BLOCK, | 

COUNT, or no operands I 516 

coded in the OUTHDR group | 1520 

(in addition see MSGEDIT macro coded | 

with any operands) I 

coded in INBLOCK group with option | 

field specified I 176 

(in addition, see MSGEDIT macro coded | 

with any operands and coded in INBLOCK) | 

MSGGEN macro coded I 230 

MSGLIMIT macro coded | 140 

ORIGIN macro coded with a concentrator specified | 500 

coded without a concentrator specified | 138 

QACTION macro coded | 1400 

RETRY macro coded | 268 

SCREEN macro coded j 220 

SEQDENCE macro coded in an incoming group | 160 

coded in an outgoing group I 140 

(also see DATETIME entry above) I 



| Figure 67. Estimate L for TCAM Message Control Program (Part 1 of 2) 



96 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



r " '" ' — — ™ _ ~ - — - —i 


1 

Storage | 




Reguirement | 


| Option 


(in bytes) j 


| SETEOM macro coded 


3168 | 


| SETSCAN, FORWARD, or MSGEDIT macro coded with a character | 


435 | 


| string 




| SETSCAN macro coded with POINT=BACK 1 


175 | 


| SETSCAN macro coded with an integer 


I 


| STARTMH macro coded with any operands 1 


1064 | 


| coded with STOP=YES, or CONT=YES 


1776 | 


| TGOTO macro coded 


272 | 


| TLIST macro coded for distribution list 


185 | 


| TLIST macro coded for cascade list 1 


185 | 


| TRANLIST macro coded 


445 | 


| UNLOCK macro coded 


40 | 


j Any macro coded with the name of an option field 




| (that is r COUNTER, LOCOPT, PATH, STARTMH, FORWARD, 




| REDIRECT ERRORMSG, MSGEDIT, MSGFORM or 




| MSGLIMIT, CTBFORM, or SETEOM) 


176 | 


| Operands on the INTRO macro 




| DTRACE=0 (Default) 


475 | 


| DTRACE#0 


575 | 


| FEATURE=(,, TIMER) (Default) 


980 | 


| FEATURE=(,,NOTIMER) 


15 | 


| FEATURE=(,2741) (default) 


1240 | 


| FEATURE=(NODIAL,N02741) 


760 | 


| FEATURE=(DIAL,N02741) 


1040 | 


| FEATURE=(,,CONCO) 


1367 | 


| INTVL*0 


I 665 | 


| LINETYP=BOTH (Default) 


13554 | 


| LINETYP=BISC 


| 10896 | 


| LINETYP=MINI 


5880 | 


| LINETYP=STSP and ENVIRON=MIXED 


| 7633 | 


| LINETYP=STSP and ENVIRON=TCAM 


| 7728 | 


| MSUNITS*0 and DISK=YES (Default) 


11570 | 


| MSUNITS#0 and DISK=NO 


| 6980 | 


| MSUNITS=0 and DISK=NO 


I 


| MSUNITS=0 AND DISK=YES 


7820 | 


| PRIMARY#SYSCON 


580 | 


| TRACE#0 


630 | 


| Opened data control blocks with following options 




| Message Queues data set 




| CPB=1 on INTRO macro 


1160 | 


| CPB>1 on INTRO macro 


1890 | 


| OPTCD=R on DCB or (MSUNITS=0 and DISK=YES) 


4096 | 


| Line Group data set 




| PCI*(N,N) on DCB macro 


912 | 


| Dial lines 


1032 | 


| Leased lines 


500 | 


| 2260 local lines 


I 710 | 


| FEATURE=(,2741) on INTRO macro (Default) 


1370 | 


| FEATURE=(NODIAL,N02741) on INTRO macro 


I 850 | 


| FEATURE=(DIAL,N02741) on INTRO macro 


1160 | 


| BFDELAY#0 on TERMINAL macro 


2168 | 



| Figure 67. Estimate L for TCAM Message Control Program (Part 2 of 2) 



Access Method Storage 97 



I Control Blocks and Information 



Storage Estimates (in bytes) 



Address Vector Table 
INTRO macro, DISK=NO 
DISK=YES 



1152+G 
12 78+G 



READY macro 



50 



Termname table 
TTABLE macro 



94+N(3+C) 



Terminal Table 
TERMINAL macro 



TLIST macro 
PROCESS macro 

LOGTYPE macro 



20+On+Dn+(68+28Pn) *+ 
[20+W+[15Pn]]** 

6+2T 
88+H+28P 

115 



Station Control Block (generated 
as a result of OPEN macro) 



(84+4R) (S+0 + L+Q+V) *** 



Process Control Block 
PCB macro 



88 



Line Control Block 
non-switched lines 
switched lines (generated as 
a result of OPEN macro) 



144 for each opened nonswitched line 
152 for each opened switched line 



Data control Blocks 
Message Queues Data Set 
Checkpoint Data Set 
Line Group Data Set 



44 
44 
40 + 41 



Invitation Lists 
INVLIST macro 



9+3E+EA 



Option Table 
OPTION macro 



10+FX 



Disk Input/Output Blocks 
(generated as a result of 
OPEN macro) 



52 for each extent of an opened 
message queues data set 



Disk Channel Program Blocks 
(generated as a result of 
execution of INTRO macro) 



8(84+K) 

Round up to the nearest 8 byte 

boundary 



Concentrator Device ID 
Table (there is one device 
ID table for each 
concentrator defined) 



9+4Y+H (3+Z) 



I Figure 68. Estimate C for TCAM Message Control program (Part 1 of 2) 



98 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Where: 

N = the number of entries defined by TERMINAL, PROCESS, TLIST 

or LOGTYPE macros. 
C = the number of characters in the longest entry name (as 

specified in the TTABLE macro) . 
H = the number of device 10 entries that have DVCID=chars. 
D = the length of device-dependent data specified on the 

TERMINAL macro: BUFSIZE, ADDR, BFDELAY, and NTBLKSZ 

(see Note 1) ; RETRY, LMD, DVCID, or TBLKSZ 

(see Note 2) operands. 
P = the number of priority levels (LEVEL operand) specified on 

TERMINAL or TPROCESS macros. 
T = the number of entries specified for a TLIST macro. 
R = the value of the DSERFG operand on the INTRO macro. 
S = the number of TERMINAL macros specifying BFDFIAY. 
T = the number of invitation lists specified on the INVLT 

operand of the DCB macro. 
E = the number of entries defined for the INVLIST macro. 
A = the length of the addressing characters defined for each 

entry in the INVLIST macro. 
F = the number of TERMINAL or TPROCESS macros which define data 

for the option field. 
X = the number of bytes defined by the OPTION macro (include 

the bytes necessary for the requested alignment) . 
B = the value of the CPB operand on the INTRO macro. 
K = the value of the KEYLEN operand on the INTRO macro. 
D = the number of lines whose TERMINAL macros do not specify 

BFDELAY, LMD, MB, QCNTRL, or DVCID=CONC. 
G = the number of characters coded in the character 

string operand of the macro. 
L = the number of TERMINAL macros specifying LMD=YES or MB=YES. 
Q = the number of TERMINAL macros specifying QCNTRL. 

V = the number of lines whose TERMINAL macros specify BVCID=CONC. 
H = the length of the delimiter (3rd operand of QCNTRL). 

Y = the number of device ID entries that have DVCID=NONE. 
Z = the length of device ID characters. 

* If outgoing messages are queued by line, (6 8+28P) should be 

included for only one terminal on the line. 
** Applies if QCNTRL is specified. If QCNTRL with level is 

specified, add 15Pn. 
*** no more than one SCB flue to the DVCID=CONC entry is 

generated per line. 



K 



Notes: 

1. Some users may use the BLOCK and SUBBLOCK operands instead of 
NTBLKSZ. 

2. Some users may use the TRANSP operand instead of TBLKSZ. 



I Figure 68. Estimate C for TCAM Message Control Program (Part 2 of 2) . 



Access Method Storage 99 



Use Figure 69 to estimate the value for P in Figure 65. Select one of the following 
entries from Figure 69 for each terminal device type associated with the opened DCB. 



, - r _ - - , 

| | Storage Reguirements | 
| Terminal Device Type I (in bytes) | 


| IBM 1030 Data Collection System I 80 + 64n | 
| IBM 1030 Data Collection System with Auto Poll | 80 + 96n | 


I IBM 1050 Data Communication System I 80 + 64n | 
| IBM 1050 Data Communication Systems with Auto Poll| 80 + 104n | 
| IBM 1050 Data Communication System on a j I 
| switched network j 88 + 80n | 


| IBM 1060 Data Communication System I 80 + 64n j 
| IBM 1060 Data Communication System with Auto Poll j 80 + 104n | 


| IBM 2260 Display Complex attached as a j I 
| remote terminal on a switched network I 80 + 64n | 
| IBM 2260 Display Complex attached with a j I 
j local configuration I 80 + 48n | 


| IBM 2265 I 80 + 64n | 


| IBM 2740 Communication Terminal I I 
| Type I: Basic nonswitched network I 88 + 80n | 
| Type II: Basic switched network I 80 + 64n | 
| Type III: Basic switched network j I 
| with transmit control I 10 + 80n | 
| Type IV: Basic nonswitched network j I 
| with Auto Poll | 80 + 104n | 


| IBM 2741 Communication Terminal | 80 + 56n j 
| IBM 2741 Communication Terminal or 5041 line on a j I 
| switched network I 80 + 72n | 


| IBM 2760 Communication Terminal on a I I 
| switched network I 80 + 64n | 
| IBM 2760 Communication Terminal on a j I 
| nonswitched network I 88 + 80n | 


I IBM 2770 Communication Terminal I 88 + 80n | 
| IBM 2770 Communication terminal with Auto Poll j 80 + 104n | 


| IBM 2788 Communication Terminal I 80 + 80n j 
| IBM 2780 Communication Terminal with I I 
| Auto Poll I 80 + 104n | 


I IBM 3735 Programmable Buffered Terminal I I 
| on a Switched Network | 80 + 96n | 
| IBM 3735 Programmable Buffered Terminal j I 
| with Auto Poll I 80 + 96n | 


| IBM 7770 Audio Response Onit | 80 + 40n | 


| ATBT Model 33/35 TWX Stations I 80 + 72n | 
| ATBT 83B3 Selective Calling Stations or | I 
| Western Union Plan 115A Outstations | 80 + 64n | 


| World Trade Telegraph Terminals I 80 + 56n | 
■ i, j 


| Where: n = the number of opened communication lines | 



| Figure 6 9. Estimate P for TCAM Message Control Program. 



100 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Use Figure 70 to estimate the value of in Figure 65, 



l— 


_ _ T 


1 


i t 

Storage | 
Requirement | 


1 


Name of Function 


Selected Option | 


(in bytes) | 


1 
1 


Subtask Trace Table 


DTRACE=a on INTRO macro | 


16(a+1) | 


r 


Interrupt Trace Table I 


TRACE=t and TREXIT=exit 




i 




on INTRO macro 


32(t+1) | 

■ 


r 
i 


Cross Reference Table I 


CR0SSRF=c on INTRO macro 


16(c+1) | 


l 


Checkpoint/Restart 


OPEN executed for check- 
point DCB 






IEDQNF Executor 




354 | 




IGG019RA-Appendage 




100 | 




Work area 




296+3E+6(C+3) | 
Where: E=value of | 
CPRCDS operand on | 
INTRO macro j 
c=value of CKREQS | 
operand on INTRO | 
macro j 




Disk I/O Buffers | 




300n | 




(for Checkpoint/ 




Where: n=1. If | 




Restart) 




n is greater than | 
I 1 # efficiency may | 
be increased by | 
overlapping I/O | 
and processing. | 


i 


Transient area 




| 850 | 


1 


On Line Test (TOTE) 


OLTEST=X on INTRO macro 


| 1024X | 




Trap Facility 


COMWRTE=m on INTRO macro 






IEDQFW-Executor 




| 1530 | 


i 


Trace routine 




| 1044 | 


t 


Application Program 


TCAH DCB opened in a 






Processing 


TCAM application program 






Work area 




(396+4R)Q | 
Where: R=value | 
of OSEREG operand j 
on INTRO macro j 
I Q=number of Opens | 




IEDQED -Open/Close 








Subtask 




| 1140 | 




One or more schedulers: 








IEDQEC-Put Scheduler | 


DCB(s) for output 


| 1500 | 




IEDQEW-Get Scheduler 


DCB (s) for input 


| 2200 | 




IEDQEZ-Get Scheduler 


I DCB(s) for input 


I 24 | 




IEDQE7-Retrieve 








Scheduler 


| QTAM Compatible DCB(s) 


| 860 | 



| Figure 70. Estimate O for message control program. 



Access Method Storage 101 



TCAM Application Programs 

Storage required for TCAM application programs can be estimated from the following 
formula: 

S=810+A+R+T+408F 



Where: 



A = the size of the access method modules. 



H = the size of the work area specified by the •BLKSIZE 1 operand of the DCB macro. 
T = the size of the TCAM macro expansions. 
F = 0, if SYNADAF is not executed. 
F = 1 , if SYNADAF is executed. 

Estimates A and T are obtained from Figures 71 and 72. 



r 


_ ._ — ..... _ _, 


i 

Storage | 
Requirements j 


i 


Option 


(in 


bytes) | 


I 


SAM DCB opened for input 




3000 | 




QTAM DCB opened for input 




2150 | 




SAM DCB opened for output 




1010 | 




QTAM DCB opened for output 




500 | 




BSAM DCB opened 




340 | 




POINT MACRO is used 




345 | 




TCOPY MACRO 




530 | 




QCOPY MACRO 




330 | 




TCHNG MACRO 




645 | 




ICOPY MACRO 




280 | 



Figure 71. Estimate A for TCAM Application Programs. 



Include the size of the macros in Figure 72 , once for each time the macro is coded. 



102 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



r 


i 


r~ 


— _,., , 


| Macro 


Instruction 


Storage Estimate 


(in bytes) | 
i 


| CHECK 




I 14 


1 


| CKREQ 




22 




| GET 




| 14 




| ICHNG 




58 




| ICOPY 




42 




| MCOUNT 




10 




| MCPCLOSE 


with password 


| 78 






without password 


68 




| MRELEASE 


with password 


78 






without password 


68 




| POINT 




16 




| PUT 




| 14 




| QCOPY 




30 




| QSTART 









| READ 




34 




| RETRIEVE 




24 




| TCHNG with password 


62 




1 without password 


I 48 




| TCOPY 




| 34 




| TPDATE 




30 




| WRITE 




| 34 





I Figure 72. Estimate T for TCAH Application Programs. 



Access Method Storage 103 



Fixed Real Storage Requirements 

The fixed real storage requirement for the message control program can be calculated from 
Figure 73. 



r 

1 s = 


L + 


C + P + (A+B) (K+12) + 


— i 

1 
■ 


| Where: 




i 


1 L = 


the 


size of the message control module from Figure 74. 




1 c = 


the 


size of the crontrol blocks and information from Figure 68. 




1 P = 


the size of the channel programs, translation tables, and 
special character tables from Figure 69. 




1 A = 


the 


value of the MSUNITS operand on the INTRO macro. 




1 B = 


the 


value of the LNUNITS operand on the INTRO macro. 




1 K = 


the 


value of the KEYLEN operand on the INTRO macro. 




1 o = 


the 


size of selected TCAM options from Figure 75. 





| Figure 73. Fixed Real Storage for Message Control Program. 

Use Figure 74 to calculate the storage requirements for L. For C, use Figure 68 but 

omit storage requirements for READY, PCB, and OPTION macros. For P, use Figure 69. For 

use Figure 75. All sums L, C, P, 0, and (A+B) (K + 12) should be rounded up to the 
nearest page size before being used in the preceding formula. 



Operands on the INTRO macro: 

LINETYP=BOTH (Default) 

LINETYP=BISC 

LINETYP=MINI 

LINETYP=STEP and ENVIRON=MIXED or TSO 

LINETYP=STSP and ENVIRON=TCAM 

TREXIT#0 and TRACE#0 

Opened data control blocks with following options: 

Message Queues data set 
CPB=1 on INTRO macro 
CPB>1 on INTRO macro 

Line Group data set: 

PCI#(N,N) on DCB macro 
Dial lines 
Leased lines 
2260 local lines 



11000 

10000 

4600 

6400 

5000 

630 



1160 
1890 



1030 
970 
500 
350 



Figure 74. Estimate L for TCAM MCP Real Storage Requirements. 



104 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



r — — . _ . — r _. ... _. ._ .,. _. _, , 

| Application Program | TCAM DCB opened in a | I 
j Processing | Message Processing | I 
| | Program | | 
| Work area j | 192Q | 
I | | Where: j 
I | I Q=number of Opens | 


| Interrupt Trace Table | TRACE=t and TRFXIT=exit | I 
| | on INTRO macro | 32(1+1) | 
• ...-. • • - • 



Figure 75. Estimate for TCAM MCP Real storage Requirements. 

TCAM Example 

This example contains the coding used and the storage requirement for the following 
telecommunications application: 

• One line with two IBM 1050 data communication system terminals (RAL1&RAL2) . 

• One line with two IBM 2740 terminals (RTP1&RTP2) . 

• One direct access device (defined by the DS DISKDCB DCB macro instruction) . 

The TCAM code on the following page defines the terminals, lines, buffers, and data 
sets for the configuration used in the example, and provides for activating and 
deactivating the TCAM message control program. 

Message Control Program Virtual Reguirement=M+L+C + P+ (A+B) (K+12) +0+TS 

M: The size of the message handler macro expansions. 



MCP 



DISKDCB 
RALDCB 



RTPDCB 



CSECT 
INTRO 



OPEN 

READY 
CLOSE 
L 
RETURN 

DCB 
DCB 



DCB 





TTABLE 


SWITCH 


OPTION 


LIST 


TLIST 


RAL1 


TERMINAL 



RAL2 



TERMINAL 



KEYLEN=1 16,LN0NITS=5,CPB=3, 

ONETYP=SYSP,FEATDRE= (NODIAL, 

N02741) , DIST=YES,OLTEST=0, 

ENVIRON=TCAM 

(DISKDCB, (INODT) , RALDCB, (INOOT) , 

RTPDCB, (INOOT)) 

(RTPDCB , , RALDCB , ,DIS KDCB) 

13,4(13) 

(14,12) 

DSORG=TQ,MACRF= (G,P) ,OPTCD=R 

DSORG=TX,MACRF=(G,P) ,TRANS=105F, 

MH=MH1050, 

SCT=1050,PCI= (N,N) INVLIST=(INVRALI, 

A,A,INVRAL2) 

DSORG=TX,MACRF= (G,P) ,TRANS=2740, 

MH=MH2740,SEC=2740,PCI=(N,N) 

INVLIST= (INVRTP,A,A) 

LAST=RTP2,MAXLEN=5 

H 

TYPE=D,LIST= (RAL1,RAL2,RTP1,RTP2) 

QBY=L,DCB=RALDCB,RLN=1,TERM=1 050, 

QOEOES=DR,ADDR=6202, ALDEST=RAL1 

SECTERM=YES,OPDATA=0,LEVEL=(241, 

242,243) 

QBY=L,DCB=RALDCB,RLN=2,TERM=1050, 

QUEUES=DR,ADDR=6402,ALTDEST=RAL2 

SECTERM=YES,OPDATA=Q,LEVEL=(241, 

242,243) 



Access Method Storage 105 



RTP1 



RTP2 



TERMINAL QBY=T,DCB=RTPDCB,RLN=1 , TERM=274I, 
QUEUES=DR,ADDR=37E201,ALTDEST=1 



TERMINAL 



QBY=T,DCB=RTPDCB,RLN=1,TERM=274I, 

QUEUES=DR,ADDR=37E201,ALTDEST=RTP1, 

SECTERM=YES,BFDELAY=5 

QBY=T r DCB=RTPDCB,RLN=1,TERM=274I, 
Q0EUES=DR,ADDR=37E401,ALTDEST=RTP2 
SECTERM=YES, BFDELAY=5 



INVRAL1 INVLIST ORDER= (RAL1+6215) 

INVRAL2 INVLIST ORDER= (RAL2+6415) 

INVRTP INVLIST ORDER= (RTP1 + E20 1,RTP2+E401) 

This message control program is for a message-switching application. It contains two 
message handlers. No provision is made for an application program. The code for the 
message handlers is given below. 

Message Control Program Virtual Reguirement=M+L+C + P+ (A+B) (K + 12) +4026 

M: The size of the message handler macro expansions. 



Name 


Macro 


Operand 


MHI050 


STARTMH 
INHDR 


LC=OUT 




CODE 


1050 




SETSCAN 


C«X» 




SEQUENCE 






FORWARD 


DEST=** 




SETSCAN 


C'/' 




MSGTYPE 


C« P» 




PRIORITY 






MSGTYPE 






INBOF 






INMSG 






INEND 






OOTHDR 






SEQUENCE 






CODE 


1050 




OUTEND 


T 


Name 


Macro 


Operand 


MH2740 


STARTMH 
INHDR 


LC=OUT 




CODE 


2740 




SETSCAN 


C»X» 




SEQUENCE 






FORWARD 


DEST=** 




INEND 






OUTHDR 






SEQUENCE 






CODE 






MSGFORM 






OUTEND 





Total for MH1050 




Total for MH2740. 
Total M , 



262 

651 Bytes 



L: The size of the message control modules. 

Non-optional modules 12097 

CODE macros 46 6 

FORWARD macros 6 90 

MSGFORM macro 288 4 

SEQUENCE macros 400 

SETSCAN macros 43 5 

STARTMH macros 1064 

TLIST macro 185 
INTRO macro with 



106 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



DTEACE=0 

FEATURE=(,, TIMER) 

INTVL=0 

LINETYP=STSP, ENVIRON=TCAM 

MSONITS=0,DISK=YES 

PRIMARY=SYSCON 

TRACE=0 

CPB=3 

FEATURE=(NODIAL,N02741) 
Message Queues Disk Data Set, OPTCD=R 
Leased Line Data Set 
BFDELAY=5 on TERMINAL macro 



475 

980 



7900 

7820 





1890 

1070 

4096 

500 

2330 



C: 



Total L 43,632 Bytes 

The size of the control blocks and information. 



Name Macro 

INTRO 

READY 

TTABLE 
RAL1 TERMINAL Terminal Table 



Control Block 
Address Vector Table 

Termname Table 



RAL2 


TERMINAL 


RTP1 


TERMINAL 


RTP2 


TERMINAL 



LIST 



TLIST 



DISKDCB 


DCB 


RALDCB 


DCB 


RTPDCB 


DCB 


INVRAL1 


INVLIST 


INVRAL2 


INVLIST 


INVRTP 


INVLIST 


SWITCH 


OPTION 



Queue Control Block 
Terminal Table 

Terminal Table 

Queue Control Block 
Terminal Table 

Queue Control Block 
Terminal Table 

Station Control Blocks 

Line Control Blocks 

Data Control Block 

Data Control Block 

Data Control Block 

Invitation List 

Invitation List 

Invitation List 

Option Table 

Disk Input/Output Blocks 

Disk Channel Program Blocks 



Op erand 
DISK=YES,ENVIRON=TCAM 

MAXLEN=5 

QBY=L,OPDATA=0,LEVEL= 
(241,242,243) ,ADDR=6202 

QBY=L,OPDATA=0,LEVEL= 
(241,242,243) ,ADDR=6402 

QBY=T, BFDEL AY=5 , ADDR= 
37E201 

QBY=T, BFDELAY=5, ADDR= 
37E401 

LIST= (RAL1 ,RAL2, RTP1 , 
RTP2) 



R equiremen t 
1278 
50 
134 



175 



95 



95 

14 

252 

288 

44 

48 

44 

14 

14 

19 

14 

52 

576 



Total C 3,139 Bytes 

P: The size of the channel programs, translation tables, and special character tables. 



Translation Table 
Special character table 
Channel Program 



1,040 
160 
176 



(A+B) (K+12) : The size of buffer units 

Total (A+B) (K + 12) 



Total P 1,3 7 6 Bytes 

640 Bytes 



0: The size of selected options. 

Total 

OC: The size of operator control 



4096 



| | Total dynamic requirement for Message Control Program. ... 53,634 Bytes | 



Access Method storage 107 



Message Control Program Fixed Storage Requirement = L+C+P+ (A+B) (K+12) +0 

L: The size of the message control modules. 

INTRO macro with 

LINETYPE=STSP,ENVIRON=TCAM 5000 
CPB=3 1890 

Leased Line Data Set 500 

7390 

C: The size of the control blocks and information from the virtual requirement. 

3369 
Hinus 

Ready 50 

Option 14 64 

3305 

P: The size of the channel programs, translation tables, and special character tables 
from the virtual requirement. 

1376 

(A+B) (K+12) : The size of the buffer units. 

640 

Total minimum fixed storage requirement 

L = 7390 round to 8192 

C = 33 05 round to 4096 

P = 1376 round to 2048 

(A+B) (K+12) = 640 round to 2048 

= round to 

1638 4 



108 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Checkpoint/Restart Work Area 
Requirement 

When using the Checkpoint/Restart facilities, the user must provide a Checkpoint/Restart 
work area in his program. This work area is reguired only when a checkpoint is taken, 
and at all other times may be used for other purposes. The size of the work area can be 
computed using the following formula: 

i ■ ■ 

| | S = 1,164 + T + 48(N-2) + D + E 



Where: 

T = the size of the TIOT when a checkpoint is taken. The size is computed as: 

T = 28 + 20A + 4B 

Where: A = the total number of data sets defined in the job step, including 
JOBLIB, if one is present. 
B = the sum of devices allocated to each data set, not including the 
first device. 

H = the number of data sets that were open when the checkpoint was taken. The 

value for N must be at least 2 and must include the checkpoint data set, even 
if this data set was not open. 

D = 344 for VS1 (for 3 RBs) 

E = if the user opens the checkpoint data set 

or 
the sum of the lengths of the IOBs created by the open routines, if the 
checkpoint/restart facility opens the checkpoint data set — plus (for VS1) 
the size of the DEB. 

• Increase the size of the work area by 3 84 bytes if all of the following 

conditions apply: (1) the user adds to a direct access output data set after a 
checkpoint is taken, (2) a new extent is reguired, and (3) a restart is then 
attempted. 



Access Method Storage 109 



Estimating the Auxiliary-Storage Requirement 



VS1 uses auxiliary storage on direct-access devices for system residence, page residence, 
and for work space. The total auxiliary- storage requirement is the sum of its 
system-residence, page-residence and work-space requirements plus the auxiliary storage 
required for input streams and output data. This section contains illustrations and 
formulas to be used in estimating the direct access auxiliary-storage requirements. 



System Residence 

The total amount of auxiliary storaqe required for system residence is determined by the 
libraries and data sets used by the system, and on the direct-access devices selected. 
Figure 76 is a summary of the required and optional system data sets for VS1. 



110 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



r — - T" - - —i 1 - — r 1 1 

| System Data | Type | System | Secondary | Cataloged | Used For/Contents | 
| | Sets | Residence | Volume | | | 
| III Allocation | | | 
1 i i i ■ ■ 1 


| Required System Data Sets | 


1 i t i i i ■" 1 
| SYSCTLG | seq. | required | yes | no | Pointers to all cataloged | 
| III II data sets | 
i I I I I i i 


I i i i i i 1 

| SYS1.LINKLIB* | PDS | optional | yes | yes | Programs and | 
j III II referred to by XCTL, | 
| III II ATTACH, LINK or LOAD | 
| III II macros or by EXEC j 
| III II statement and nonresident | 
| III II operating system programs | 


| SYS1.L0GREC a j seq. | required | no j no | Statistical data about | 
I III II machine and device errors | 
j i i i i i i 


I ill II I 
| SYS1.HACLIB | PDS | optional | yes | yes | System macro definitions | 
i i i i i i ■ 


I i I i II l 

| SYS1. NUCLEUS | PDS | required | no | yes | Resident portion of | 
| III II control program | 


I SYS1.PAGE j seq. | optional | yes | yes | System page resident | 
I III II device | 
j ill ii i 


i II 1 1 1 ' 1 

| SYS1.PARMLIB | PDS | optional | no | yes | BLDL list and resident | 
j III II access methods lists j 
1 I I i i i i 


i ii i i ....... | I 

| SYS1.PR0CLIB | PDS | optional | yes | yes | System & user cataloged | 
| III II procedures | 
i I'll ii i 


I I I I I I l 
| SYS1.SAMPLIB | PDS | optional | yes | optional | Independent utilities, SMF| 
| III II modules, installation | 
| III II verification procedures, | 
I III II IPL text, and job queue | 
I II I I I dump j 
i i i i i i i 


i ii i i i l 
| SYS1.SVCLIB 1 | PDS | required | yes | yes | Nonresident SVC routines, | 
| III II data mgmt. access methods, | 
| || II 1 and standard system error | 
| III II recovery procedures | 
i i i i i i i 


i i i I i i i 

| SYS1.SYSJ0BQE I seq. | optional | no | yes | Job scheduler work area | 

1 11 1 l\ 1 


ill I I i l 
| SYS1.SYSP00L | seq. | optional | no | no | JECS work areas and all | 
| || | | | user input & output | 
I II I I | data sets | 
j i i i i i i 


i II I ' ' 1 1 1 

| SWADS | seq. | optional | yes | yes | Scheduler work area & | 
| III II problem program tables | 



| Figure 76. Summary of the required and optional system data sets. (Part 1 of 2) 



Estimating the Auxiliary-Storage Requirement 111 



1 


■ — ~ — i" 

System Data | 

1 
1 

JL. 


Type 
Sets 


-i r - — t- 

| System | Secondary | 
j Residence | Volume | 

| | Allocation j 
i i • 


Cataloged 


- T _ . — — , 

| Used For/Contents | 

I I 

I I 
• j 


1 


Optional System 


Data 


Sets 












r 
■ . 


" — V 
SYS1.ACCT | 


seq. 


i -..„., i 

| optional | 


no 


i 


no 




i 1 

| User accounting data | 


I 
i 


SYS1.BR0DCAST 3 | 


dir. 


| optional 


no 




yes 




| RTAM messages j 


I 

i 


SYS1.DCMLIB* | 
- j.. 


PDS 


| optional I 
■ . ... ,. i 


no 


■ 


yes 




| Display console modules | 


r 
■ 


SYS1.DUMP | 


seq. 


l i 
| optional | 


no 


I 


optional 


| System abend dump routines | 


l 


SYS1.IMAGELIB | 


PDS 


| optional | 


no 


t 


yes 




| 1103 & 3211 OCB images, | 
| 3211 FCB images, & 3525 | 
| data protection images | 


i 


SYS1.HANX | 


seq. 


| optional | 


no 


I 


yes 




| SMF primary data set | 


l 

i 


SYS1.MANY | 


seq. 


| optional | 


no 




yes 




| SHF alternate data set | 


i 

i 


SYS1.RMTMAC | 
, ,- ... .1. 


PDS 


| optional | 


yes 




yes 




| RTAM source and macro | 
| definitions | 


l 


SYS1.TELCMLIB | 


PDS 


| optional | 


yes 




yes 




| TCAM load modules | 


l 


SYS1.UADS 3 | 


PDS 


| optional | 
« « 


yes 


■ 


yes 




| Authorized Remote Users | 
■ • 


l 


*Space should be allocated in cyli 

2 Space must not be allocated by tl 

3 Reguired if RTAM is in the systen 
refer to 0S/VS1 RES system Proar? 

♦Required if support for the 2250 
the system. For storage reguirei 
Consoles. 


Lnders. 

le user. 

l. For storag< 
immer's Guide. 

or 32 77 Model 
lents for this 


a regi] 

2 diE 
data 


lirements for RTAM data sets, j 

;play console is to be included in | 
set refer to 0S/VS1 Display | 



| Figure 76. Summary of the required and optional system data sets. (Part 2 of 2) 



112 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



System Catalog (SYSCTLG) 

The number of tracks required on the system residence volume for the system catalog is 
estimated from the following formula: 

Number of blocks required +1 



Number of tracks = Number of blocks on each track 

The number of blocks required is calculated as follows: 

D£ - 3X£ Vn A + C 

Number of blocks = L + 1.17X£ +K ( + 1) + N + — + + 1 

6 20 14 

Where: 

L = the number of index levels. 

X£= the number of indexes defined at level . (Each index level should be evaluated 
separately and the result added to the total requirement.) 

D£= the number of data sets cataloged at level . (Each index level should be evaluated 
separately and the result added to the total requirement.) 

K = if (D£ - 3X£) is negative; otherwise, K=1. 

N = the number of data sets that occupy six or more volumes. 

V n = the number of volumes occupied by the nth data set that resides on six or more 

volumes. (Each data set should be evaluated separately and the result added to the 
total requirement.) 

A = the number of high level aliases. 

C = the number of pointers to the control volume (CVOL) . 

Note : Round off all fractions to next lower integers before calculating totals. 

The number of blocks on each track is as follows: 

• IBM 2314/2319 Disk Storage - 17 

• IBM 2305-2 Drum Storage - 26 

• IBM 3330 Disk Storage - 28 



Estimating the Auxiliary-Storage Requirement 113 



I RTAM Message Data Set (SYS1.BRODCAST) 



The number of tracks required for RTAM messages at your installation can be estimated 
from the following formula: 

Number of tracks = (1 + H + B + (B t 25) + (D * 9) ) x K 

Where: 

B = the maximum number of notices that can be placed in the data set by the central 
operator. 

K = the number of 129-byte keyed records on a track 

• 25 for 2314/2319 

• 19 for 2305-1 

• 35 for 2305-2 

• 40 for 3330 

M = the maximum number of messages that can be sent to a user that is not logged on the 
system. 



| = the maximum number of users for the RTAH system. 



114 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Nucleus Library (SYS 1. NUCLEUS) 

The number of tracks required on the system residence volume for the nucleus is estimated 
from the following formula: 

(S v (1024 x T)) + (12 f T) + I 

Where: 

S = the size of the nucleus in bytes and is equal to the fixed storage requirement 

(Figure 17 Total), plus 64K (the approximate size of NIP and pageable supervisor, 
less tables and dummy areas). 

T = a device parameter, defined as follows: 

• IBM 2314/2319 Disk Storage, T = 4 

• IBM 2305-2 Drum Storage, T = 6.8 

• IBM 3330 Disk Storage, T = 6.8 

I = an allowance for CSECT Identification Record. Add 2 percent to the result. 

When allocating space for SIS 1 . NUCLEUS, you must indicate in the SPACE parameter the 
number of 256-byte records to be allocated for a directory. In most cases, one 256-byte 
record is sufficient. 



Estimating the Auxiliary-Storage Requirement 115 



SVC Library (SYS1.SVCLIB) 

The amount of auxiliary storage required by the SVC Library depends on the components 
included in the system. The actual amount of storage is the sum of all applicable 
| entries from Figure 77 plus the number of tracks required for directory records. 



Description 



Number of 
Directory 
Records (1) 



Number of Tracks 



2305-2 
Disk 



3330 
Disk 



2311/2319 
Disk 



Primary data mgmt/ 
other control prog, 
functions for VS1 
(Notes 2-3) 
BISAM/QISAM 
BTAM 

Chkpt/restart 
6AN 

ISAM 



MCS (Note 4) 

DDE 

Scheduler & JES 

TCAM 

RTAM 



124 


115 


119 


202 


22 


21 


21 


40 


18 


10 


10 


16 


6 


4 


4 


6 


4 


4 


4 


8 



33 



2 

2 

10 

16 

1 



25 



1 
1 
9 
13 
1 



25 



1 
1 
9 
13 
1 



40 



2 

2 

16 

24 

2 



Notes: 

1. Number of 256-byte records to be allocated for a directory when 
a new partitioned data set is being defined. 

The number of directory records that can be contained on a 
track is as follows: 

• IBM 2305-2 Disk Storage - 26 

• IBM 3330 Disk Storage - 28 

• IBM 2314/2319 Disk Storage - 17 

2. These estimates include the tracks required for MCH. 

3. If SMF is specified during system generation, add the 
following: one directory record, one track for a 2314/2319, 
2305 or 3330. 

4. If a 2740 is specified as a console in MCS and there is no BTAM 
support, add the following: 1 directory entry, and 2 tracks 
for a 3330 or 2305 or 3 tracks for a 2314/2319. If a 2250 is 
specified as a console in MCS, add the following: 

1 directory entry, and 1 track for a 3330 or 2305, or 2 tracks 
for a 2314/2319. 



| Figure 77. SVC library track requirements. 



116 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Machine/Error/Recording Data Set 
(SYS1.LOGREC) 

You need not allocate space for this data set; however, the amount of space used must be 
known to estimate the total storage requirement of VS1. 

The number of tracks required on the system residence volume for the LOGREC data set 
is estimated from the following formula: 

Number of tracks = R + D * s 



Where: 

D = the number of uniquely addressable I/O devices in the system. 

R,S = device parameter defined in Figure 78. 

Note : Round off fractions to the next higher integer. 

The space for SYS1. LOGREC is for an average installation and may be increased or 
decreased depending on specific requirements. For example, if there is no dismount 
record recording (3410,3420) or no TCAM, the size of SYS1. LOGREC could be decreased after 
SYSGEN. 



1 — — - - 

I Device Parameters 

1 
1 


| 2314 
| 2319 
| Disk 


2305-2 
Disk 


3330 
Disk 


— i 
■ 


1 H • 
1 

L..,, 


with MCH 
(models 145, 15 


5) | 28 


15 


15 


■ 1 


r 

1 s 




| 30 

_L. 


40 


50 


i 



I 



Figure 78. Device parameters for LOGREC. 



SYS1.SAMPLIB 

This library contains stand-alone and system utilities, IPL text, SMF routines and 
routines contained in the Installation Verification Procedure jobstream. 

Figure 79 gives the auxiliary storage requirement for SYS1 .SAMPLIB. These track 
requirements are for the blocked library. 

The blocksize for a 2314/2319 is 7294 bytes. 
The blocksize for a 3330 is 13030 bytes. 
The blocksize for a 2305-2 is 14660 bytes. 



Number of Tracks 



Number of 
Directory Rec. 



2314/2319 



1 

3330 2305-2 | 
1 



220 



150 



50 



| Figure 79. Auxiliary storage requirements for SYS 1. SAMPLIB. 



Estimating the Auxiliary -Storage Requirement 117 



Page Data Set (SYS 1. PAGE) 

Auxiliary storage for the page file consists of one to eight page data sets. These data 
sets can be on different device types, as long as no more than two different types are 
used. A single extent is allocated for each data set. To improve performance, the 
device (s) can be dedicated to the page file. However, this is not a reguirement. The 
page data set can reside on an IBM 2314, 2319, 2305-2, or 3330. 

To estimate the auxiliary- storage requirement for SYS1.PAGE data set(s) use Figure 80. 

i 1 1 1 

Result | 



Number of 
2K blocks 



Number of 
tracks 



Number of 
cylinders 



vir tual storage siz e - real-storage size 
2048 (see Note 1) 



n um ber of 2K blocks 
X (see Note 2) 

(round result up to next higher integer) 



number of tracks 

Y (see Note 3) 

(round result up to next higher integer) 



Notes: 

1. Real-storage size is less than, or equal to, 786,432 

(768K) bytes, that is, the amount of real storage below 
the Virtual=Real line 



2. 



h 



I 3 



I 5 



I 6 



3. 



I Y 



| 20 



19 



I 8 



Device 



2314/2319 



3330 



23 05-2 



Device 



2314/2319 



3330 



2305-2 



Figure '80. Auxiliary storage requirement for SYS1.PAGE. 

The maximum number of pages supported is 8192 2K pages minus the lesser of 384 2K 
pages or the number of real storage pages. The page capacity of the various devices is 
indicated below. 

i 1 1 1 ' 1 

| Device | 2314/2319 | 3330 | 2305-2 | 

h 1 1 J J 

| Page/pack | 12,000 | 38,285 | 4608 | 
l 1 1 : I l 



118 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Link Library (SYS1.LINKLIB) 

The amount of auxiliary storage required by the link library depends on the components 
selected during system generation. Figure 81 gives the auxiliary-storage requirements 
for the Link library. The actual amount of storage required for this library is the sum 
of all applicable entries from Figure 81 plus the number of tracks required for directory 
records. 



r* 


— _ r . 






— r - 








i 










I 




Numb 


er of Tracks | 






Number of 
Directory 


• 












Description | 


t 




2314 


3330 


2305-2 | 


i_ 




Block 


s (1) 






2319 
Disk 


Disk 


Disk | 


r 
| • 


Control Program | 
Nodules for Job | 
Hgmt., supr., | 
System Utilities, | 
and other control| 


















program functions! 




86 






399 


222 


217 | 


| • 


CRJE | 




3 






15 


10 


10 | 


1 • 


Graphics j 


















GSP | 




15 






18 


10 


9 I 




PORs (2) | 




8 






9 


5 


5 I 


i • 


Basic EREP | 




16 






25 


13 


12 | 




with 3330 | 




2 






4 


2 


2 I 




with 2305 | 










3 


2 


2 I 




with M135 | 










2 


1 


1 | 




with M145 | 










6 


3 


3 I 




with RDE | 










3 


2 


2 I 




with 2715 | 










2 


1 


1 I 


| • 


TCAH | 




21 






35 


22 


19 | 


1 • 


SNF | 










3 


2 


2 I 


1 • 


RTAH | 

■ 




2 


■ .. 




20 


19 


8 I 


| Notes: 
















I 1 


The number of 256-byte 


records to 


be allocated 


for a directory | 




when a new partitioned 


data 


set 


is being defined. The number of | 




directory record 


s that 


can 


be contained 


on a track is 17 for an | 




IBM 2314/2319 Disk, 28 


for 


an IBM 


3330, 


and 26 


for an IBM 2305-2. | 


I 2 


Includes 675 byt 


es for 


the 


PORs 


ATTINQ storage 


requirement. | 



I 



I Figure 81. Track requirement for the Link Library. 



Estimating the Auxiliary-Storage Requirement 119 



System Job Queue (SYS1.SYSJOBQE) 



SYS1.SYSJ0BQE track requirements for VS1 scheduler work space can be estimated in Figure 
82. 



Calculation 



Description 



Enter Value 



AvB 



(LXQ) - F 



N f F 



(SxT) f F 



(OxV) t F 



J T F 



N = 



S = 



D = 



V = 



= the number of tracks required for 
Queue Control Records, 
where A = 37x[ number of entries 

in QID table- 1 ]+76 
B = 53 for 2314/2319 
= 63 for 23 05/2 
= 76 for 3330 
= the number of tracks required for Job 
Queue data records (1 76- bytes/record) 
F = 26 for 2314 or 2319 
= 40 for 2305-2 
= 45 for 3330 
This value for F is used in all of the 
following calculations. 
= the size of logical track in 176-byte 
records (value specified in the sysgen 
parameter JOBQFMT in the SCHEDULE macro) . 
= the maximum number of jobs on all input 

queues at any one time 

the sum of output queue sizes for all 
36 classes, where each class output is 
determined by: 

Rn x On 
Rn= the maximum number of jobs on an 
output queue for class n at any 
one time. 
0n= the average size of a job in the 
output for class n calculated as 
the number of SYSODT data sets for 
that class n (plus 1 if MSGCLASS=n) . 
If this number is less than the 
size of a logical track (JOBQFMT 
parameter), use the size of 1 track, 
an estimate of the amount of space (in 
records) that system tasks (excluding 
initiators) would require if the table 
was placed on the SHADS data set. 
= the maximum number of system tasks active 
at any one time. System tasks include 
readers, writers, LOGON terminals etc., 
and any generalized start problem programs 
(i.e. those programs started from the 

console with a START command) 

the maximum number of initiators active 
at any one time. 

an estimate of the amount of space an 
initiator would require if the tables 
were put on the SHADS data set . JOBQLMT 
should also be added to this estimate. 
= the value of the JOBQTMT parameter 
specified at sysgen in the SCHEDOLR 

macro 

TOTAL TRACK REQUIREMENT FOR SYS1 .SYSJOBQE , 



| Figure 82. Track requirements for VS1 Scheduler on SYS1 .SYSJOBQE. 



120 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



During normal job execution, the value of JOBQLMT should be the same as SWDSLMT (in 
the JES system generation) , plus the product of the logical track size (system generation 
parameter JOBQFMT in SCHEDDLF macro) times the average number of SYSOUT classes used in 
the job. 

If jobs with automatic restart may be held for operator restart, the JOBQLMT 
reguirement must be increased because the system must maintain both the gueue records and 
the housekeeping records for the held jobs until they have completed processing and are 
written. 

The total JOBQLMT reguired when jobs may be held is: 

JOBQLMT = (H+1) (L+S+(10xA) +C) 

A = the number of times a job may be restarted automatically. 

C = 12xA for checkpoint restart jobs only. 

H = number of jobs that may be held at any one time. 

L = value of JOBQLMT if automatic restart is not used. 

S = the size of the SWADS data set (in records) , see Figure 85. 

Note 1: Queue space is not freed when the problem program ends or when a STOP command is 
processed. It is freed only when the output writer has finished processing all output 
for the job, or when the output is canceled by the CANCEL command. Therefore, the amount 
of space allowed must be large enough to contain the active jobs plus those waiting on 
the gueue. The best way to prevent gueue space from being tied up is to have one or more 
writers working at all times, thus freeing gueue space more guickly. 

A 2305-2 may be completely allocated for the job gueue. The 2314 and 2319 are restricted 
to a maximum of 1,170 tracks and the 3330 is restricted to a maximum of 728 tracks. 

Note 2: Reguirements for 0S/VS1 JOBQOE are less than or egual to the reguirements for 
OS/MFT. 

SYS1.SYSJOBQE track reguirements for RTAM can be estimated in Figure 83. 

i 1 1 

| Jobs per physical tracks (Notes 1,2) | 

Description | f 

| 2314/2319 2305-1 2305-2 3330 



+ 



• RTAM 



1.5 



1.3 



2.3 



2.5 



Notes: 



Job size was defined as follows: 

1 logical track containing DER,JMR,ACT, route table, 

SCD 
1 logical track for Class A output (including system 

messages) . Space remains on track for 1 

additional DSB. 
1 logical track for Class B output. Space remains on 

track for 4 additional DSBs. 

These figures are based on Compile, Load and Go 
procedure in SYS1. PROCLIB, with a SYSABEND DD added 
to the Go step. Default MSGCLASS=A was used. 



| Figure 83. SYS1 . SYSJOBQE space reguirements for RTAM. 



Estimating the Auxiliary-Storage Reguirement 121 



System SPOOL Data Set 
(SYS1.SYSPOOL) 



SYS1. SYS POOL space regu 
lesser degree, the numb 
number of logical cylin 
SYS 1. SYS POOL data set i 
(whichever occurs first 
reguired for SYS1.SYSP0 
capacity as defined in 
size is 20 logical cyli 
2305-2 disk. 



irements are a function of 
er of spooled data sets, th 
ders in SYS1.SYSPOOL affect 
s limited to a total of 64 K 
) . Figure 84 can be used t 
OL. This number is used in 
the appropriate component d 
nders, or 5 tracks on a 231 



the total volume of SPOOL data. To a 
e number of jobs in the system, and the 
the space reguirements. The 
tracks for all volumes or 10 volumes 
o determine the number of blocks 

the formula for the SPOOL device track 
escription publication. The minimum 
4 or 2319 disk or 3 tracks on a 3330 or 



J = number of concurrent jobs in all 
stages of processing plus one for 
active system tasks, such as readers, 
writers, and initiators 



V = 



maximum number of SYSIN and SYSOUT 
records for all jobs plus 600 for 
each active system task. If the 
system log function is present in 
the system, add twice the value 
specified for WTLRCDS in the JES 
macro ......... 



L = 



maximum SYSIN or SYSOUT record size. 
This value is the largest record size 
of any unit record device. (For a 
1403 printer, the value would be 132) 



S = BOFSIZE specified in the JES macro. 



Substitute the above values in the following 
formula: 

V x L 

S -16 . . . 



4 x J 



TOTAL BLOCKS FOR SYS1.SYSPOOL . . 



Variables (except S) are not sysgen values, but are estimates of 
maximum system activity. 



Figure 84. SYS1.SYSP00L space reguirements. 



122 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



SYS1.SYSP00L SPACE/REQUIREMENT EXAMPLE 



1. The maximum number of jobs to be run concurrently is 4. This requires 4 initiators. 
Also, the system uses one reader and tvo writers. Thus: 

4 concurrent jobs 4 

4 initiators 4 

1 reader 1 

2 writers _2 

J equals 11 

2. The number of SYSIN records per job is estimated to be 2000 , and the number of SYSOOT 
records per job is estimated to be 10,000. The WTLRCDS specification for system loq 
is 1000, the value of V is developed as follows: 

2000 SYSIN estimate per job 

10000 SYSOOT estimates per job 

12000 total data volume per job 

jc_4 number of concurrent jobs 

U 8000 total SYSIN and SYSOOT data volume for all jobs 

4200 (600 each for 4 initiators, 1 reader, 2 writers) 

2000 twice the WTLRCDS specification 

5420 the value of V 

3. If the system uses a 1403 printer as an output device, the value of L is 132. 

4. JES BOFSIZE is specified as 500. 

Substituting the above values in the formula (Figure 84) yields: 

V x L 

S -16 = 14,727 

8 x L 

S -16 = 892 

4 x J 44 

B = 15,663 blocks required on SYS1.SYSP00L 

5. If the spool device type is a 2314, the number of tracks required is 1322. 



FORMOLA FOR SPOOL CYLINDER HAP SIZE 

This formula is used in computing Protected Queue Area requirements (Figure 7) and System 
Queue Area requirements (Figure 18). The formula follows: 

15 + ,12(a a -Tb i ) + (a a rb a ) + (a 3 *b 3 ) = spool cylinder map size 

where: 

a*- = total number of tracks on all 2314s or 2319s. 

a a = total number of tracks on all 3330s. 

a' = total number of tracks on all 2305- 2s. 

The b n values require the spool record size and records per track for a device type. 

Record size defaults to 880 unless the BOFSIZE parameter is used in the JES sysgen 
macro or the BOFSIZE parameter is used in the JESPARMS member of SYS1 . PARMLIB. If 
BOFSIZE is specified in both JES and JESPARMS, the value in JESPARMS is used. 

Estimating the Auxiliary-Storage Requirement 123 



Records per track for a device can be determined using record size (without keys) and 
records/track information found in any of several manuals (for example; Job Contro l 
Language User's Guide . GC28-6703) . 

Allocation unit defaults to 28,672 bytes unless another value is specified in the 
ALCONIT parameter in the JESPARMS member of SYS1. PARMLIB. 

For any a n r b n = . all o cation unit in b yt es 

record size X records/track for the device 

Each of the fractional b n values should be rounded up to the next integer. For 
example, the fraction 

6000 

5668 rounds up to 2. 

Each of the (a n *b n ) fractions should be rounded down to the next integer. 

The fraction 14005 2 rounds down to 7002. 

The formula is used •as is* for computing PQA requirements. When used in computing 
SQA requirements, the results of the formula should be multiplied by 3. 



124 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Work Space for the Scheduler Work 
Area Data Set (SWADS) 

SHADS record requirements for scheduler work space can be estimated in Figure 85 



t 1 

Enter Value 2 | 
1 



Calculation 



Description 



2A v 3 

2B 

C r 28 

D v 176 

2E 
(F - 5) 



* 15 



(2G+H) t 118 

2J f 11 
K l Hit 

L v 4 

2M - 2L 

(N t 28) 



+ (N * 15) 



P r 4 



A = the number of passed data sets in the 
job 



B = the number of steps in the job. 



C = the number of volume serial numbers for 
all steps that use existing data sets 
or specific volumes 



D = the number of characters in data set 
names (including qualifiers) for all 
job steps that use the VOL=REF=dsname 
DD parameter (see Note 4) 



E = the number of DD statements in the job. . 

F = the number of volume serial numbers 

for all data sets (see Note 4) 



G = the number of non-temporary data sets 

in the job. 
H = the total length of non-temporary data 

set names in the job 



J = the maximum number of DD cards per step . 

K = the maximum number of devices for a 

job step 

L = the number of entire generated data 

groups used during the job 



M = the total number of data sets in all 
generated data groups used in the job. 

N = the number of new volumes being used 
in job when restarted 



P = the number of entire generated data 
groups per job. step (required for 
deferred restart only) 



TOTAL NUMBER OF RECORDS FOR SWADS DATA SET (1,3) 



13 



Note 1. 

Note 2, 
Note 3, 



Note 4. 



These calculations must be used for all procedures (cataloged and 

in-stream) used in a job. 

Round off all fractions to the next higher integer. 

If you allocate in terms of tracks, divide the result by the number of 

176-byte records per physical track according to the following table: 

2314,2319 26 

2305-2 40 

3330 45 

Evaluate each group separately and then sum. 



Figure 85. SHADS track requirements. 



Estimating the Auxiliary-Storage Requirement 125 



The Procedure Library (SYS1.PROCLIB) 



IBM supplies cataloged procedures to perform many 
required by these procedures depends on the device 
whether the procedure library is unblocked or bloc 
the storage needed when the procedure library is u 
additional cataloged procedures for the library, t 
be added. If the user blocks the procedure librar 
must be adjusted accordingly. This is accomplishe 
required for logical records. Then apply the resu 
selected, to the track capacity formula in the app 
publication. 



routine operations. The storage 

on which the library resides and on 
ked. These track requirements reflect 
nblocked. If the user supplies 
he additional storage requirements must 
y, the auxiliary-storage requirements 
d by determining the number of blocks 
It, along with the block size you 
ropriate device component description 



r— r 


Number of 
Directory 


Number 


of Tracks 




1 


I Description | 


2314 


2305-2 


3330 






Records 


2319 












Disk 


Disk 


Disk 




I • Standard | 


2 


8 


6 


6 




1. ,,,_ ... L 










■ 



126 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



The Parameter Library (SYS1.PARMLIB) 

SYS1. PARMLIB — This data set contains the members in the following list. The member 
names shown in parentheses are the standard names used by IBM. 

1. The four resident access methods (RAM) lists (IEAIGGOO, IEAIGG01, IEAIGG02, and 
IEAIGG03) . 

2. The resident BLDL list (IEABLDOO) . 

3. The two resident SVC (RSVC) lists (IEARSVOO and IEARSV01) . 

4. The resident ERP list (IEAIGEOO) . 

5. The PAGE parameters list (IEASYSOO) . 

6. The list used to concatenate data sets to SYS1.LINKLIB (LNKLSTOO) . 

7. The list of permanently resident DASD volume characteristics (PRESRES) . 

8. The list of System Management Facility default options (SMFDEFLT) . 

9. The list of Job Entry subsystem reconfiguration parameters (JESPARMS) . 

10. The list of Remote Teleprocessing Access Method (RTAM) default parameters 
(RESPARMS) . 

If the Automated System Initialization function is to be used, the following members 
may be optionally included in SYS 1. PARMLIB: 

1. List(s) of members of SYS 1. PARMLIB to be used in Automated System Initialization. 

2. NIPxxxxx member (s) for system parameters. 

3. JESxxxxx member (s) for Job Entry Subsystem reconfiguration parameters* 

4. DFNxxxxx member(s) for DEFINE parameters. 

5. SETxxxxx member (s) for SET parameters. 

6. PRExxxxx member (s) for permanently resident volume list parameters. 

7. CMDxxxxx member(s) for automatic commands. 

8. SMFxxxxx member(s) for System Management Facility parameters. 

9. RESxxxxx member (s) for RTAM parameters. 

Parameter library (SYS1. PARMLIB) track reguirements on the system residence volume 
are: 

2305-2 Fixed-Head File 3 tracks 
2314 Disk 4 tracks 

3330 Disk 3 tracks 

The number of directory records is 2 r unless the user adds many additional members to 
the library (for example, in support of Automated System Initialization). Each directory 
record holds a minimum of 5 entries and a maximum of 14 entries, depending on the length 
of the user data field. normally the user data fields are not set unless specifically 
reguested. 

The system normally builds 9 members at system generation, plus one additional member 
if RESIDENT=ERP is specified on the CTRLPROG macro, plus two additional members if 
RESIDENT=TRSVC is specified on the CTLPROG macro. 

Estimating the Auxiliary-Storage Reguirement 127 



For a brief description of the members of SYS1 . PARMLIB, refer to the preceding 
discussion of SYS1. PARMLIB in this section. For information on Automated System 
Initialization, refer to the 0S/VS1 Planning and D se Guide , listed in the Preface. 



The Image Library (SYS1.IMAGELIB) 

The number of tracks required on a permanently mounted volume for SYS1 .IHAGELIB can be 
estimated from the following formula: 

Number of tracks = 2804 ( (A+B) 180 ) +( (C+D) 270) +( (E+ F) 540) + 80G + 12 + 1 

1024T T 

Number of Directory Blocks = (4+2 ( A+C+E) +B+D+F) 52 + J 

256 

Where: 



A 


= 


Number of 


B 


= 


Number of 


C 


= 


Number of 


D 


= 


Number of 


E 


= 


Number of 


F 


= 


Number of 


G 


= 


Number of 


T 




• 4 for 
•6.8 for 
•6.8 for 



3211 FCB images supplied by IBM. 
expected user defined FCB images. 
1403 UCS images supplied by IBM. 
user defined 1403 UCS images. 
3211 DCS images supplied by IBM. 
user defined 3211 DCS images, 
expected DPI images for 3525 
2314/2319 Disk storage. 
2305-2 Drum storage. 
3330 Disk storage. 



Macro Library (SYS1.MACLIB) 

Figure 86 gives the auxiliary-storage requirement for the blocked macro library. The 
actual amount of storage required by the library is the sum of all applicable entries in 
Figure 86 plus the number of tracks required for the directory record. 





Description 


Number of 
Directory 
Records 


Number 


of Track 


s 






2314 
2319 

Disk 


2305-2 
Disk 


3330 
Disk 


■ 


I • 

I • 
I • 
I • 
I • 
I 


Basic system 

macros 

BTAM 

Graphics 

TCAM 

OCR 


10 

2 

7 I 
10 
1 1 


310 

40 

51 

179 

! 9 


181 

20 

29 

150 

5 


183 

24 

31 

117 

5 


r 


1 















| Figure 86. Auxiliary storage requirement for the Macro Library. 



128 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



The Subroutine Libraries 

Many components of VS1 have subroutine libraries. The size of any subroutine library is 
the sum of all applicable entries in the library plus the number of tracks required for 
the directory record. The auxiliary storage required for these libraries is given in 
Figure 87. 



Description 



Number of 
Directory 
Records (1) 



Number of Tracks (2) 



2305-2 
Disk 



2314 
2319 
Disk 



3330 
Disk 



SYS1.TELCMLIB 
for BTAM 
for CBJE 
for TCAM 



1 

6 

20 



2 

8 

20 



2 
12 
32 



2 

8 

20 



Notes: 



The number of 256-byte directory records to be 
allocated for a directory when a new partitioned data 
set is being defined. The number of directory 
records that can be contained on one track is: 

• IBM 2305-2 26 records 

• IBM 2314/2319 17 records 

• IBM 3330 28 records 

Add 2 percent to total requirement for CSECT 
Identification Routine. 



I Figure 87. Auxiliary storage requirement for the subroutine libraries. 

The SMF Data Set (SYS 1. MAN) 

This data set resides on direct access. A primary data set (SYS 1. MANX) and an alternate 
data set (SYS1.MANY) are required. The size of the data set depends on the size of the 
buffer and the number of records written within a given time interval (refer to OS/VS1 
| SMF Manu al, GC35-0004) * 

The Core Image Dump Data Set (SYS 1 .DUMP) 

This data set can reside on tape or direct access. If it resides on direct access, the 
number of tracks allocated for the data set must be large enough to contain all of 
virtual storage. Use the following chart to determine the number of tracks required: 



1 

1 

1 


Device 


— i 


i 


Virtual Storage 


a Size 


■ ~ i 


1 

1 

1 


1024K 


2048K 


4096K 


8192K 


16384K | 


1 

| IBM 
| IBM 
| IBM 

i- 


2314 Disk 
3330 Disk 
2305-2 Fixed Head 


File 


171 

103 

86 

i 


341 
205 
171 


6 82 
409 
341 


1364 
818 
680 


2728 | 
1656 | 
1364 | 

■ 



Estimating the Auxiliary-Storage Requirement 129 



The Data Set for Checkpoint/Restart 

The checkpoint data set may be on any direct -access device or any magnetic tape unit 
supported by BSAM or BPAM. The size of the checkpoint data set is determined by the 
user. The following information can be used as a guideline in determining the size of 
this data set. 

Figure 88 contains the size and number of records written when a checkpoint is taken. 
The number of tracks or the amount of tape occupied by the checkpoint data set can be 
determined by applying the number of records and their sizes against either the track 
capacities of the direct-access device or the recording density and type for the magnetic 
tape device. 



Description 



Record 

Size 

(bytes) 



Number of Records 



CHR (checkpoint 

header record) 

DSDR (data set 

descriptor rec) 

CIR (core image rec) 

SOB (supervisor rec) 



400 



U00 | 


N/2 (1) 


2K 


I A/2K (2) 


200 


I 1 



Where: 

N = the number of data sets defined in the job step. 

A = the amount of storage reguired by the user-written 
program. 

Notes: 

1. Add one record for the first generation data set and a 
second record for each additional 4 generation data 
sets. Also, add one record for each data set that 
reguires 6 to 20 volumes and one record for each 
additional 15 volumes. That is, if the data set 
reguires 35 volumes, add 2 records; if 50 volumes, add 
3 records, etc. 

2. Add one CIR for the Page Control Table (PCT) . 



Figure 88. Auxiliary storage reguirement for the checkpoint restart data set. 



130 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



The TCAM Message Queues Data Set 

If you use TCAM, you can queue messages on the IBM 3330/2314 Direct Access Storage 
Facility. The number of records that can be written per track on this device can be 
estimated by the following formula: 

1/(. 00070 KEYLEN) for 2314/2319 
13165/(188+KEYLEN) for 3330 

Where: 

KEYLEN = the value specified on the KEYLEN operand of the INTRO macro instruction. 

The aessage queues data set must begin on a cylinder boundary and it can have multiple 
extents on multiple volumes. The data section of each record is 6 bytes long and the key 
section (message) is the same length as specified on the KEYLEN operand. Figure 89 
contains examples of the number of records per track on the 2314. 



r - - —i 

I Records per track 
| Value of KEYLEN 


17 
255 


17 

248 


18 
247 


18 
227 


19 
226 


19 
209 


20 
208 


20 
193 


— l 

21 I 

178 | 

r 


I Records per track 
| Value of KEYLEN 


23 
164 


24 
163 


24 
151 


25 
150 


25 
135 


26 
134 


26 
128 


27 
127 


i 

27 | 

117 | 


| Records per track 
| Value of KEYLEN 


30 
99 


30 
91 


31 
90 


31 
84 


32 
83 


32 
76 


33 
75 


33 
70 


34 | 
69 | 


I Records per track 
I Value of KEYLEN 

i i 


36 
52 


37 
51 


37 
46 


38 
45 


38 
41 


39 

40 


39 
36 


40 
35 


40 | 

32 | 

.. i 



Figure 89. Track capacity for TCAM message queue data set on an IBM 2314/2319. 



Estimating the Auxiliary-Storage Requirement 131 



THE TCAH CHECKPOINT DATA SET 

For the IBM 231U/2319 and 3330 Direct Access storage Facility the size in bytes of the 
checkpoint data set is given in Figure 90. 

i ' 1 

I Size = (101 + 1. 05L1)+1.39AxL2+N(101 1.05L3) + (M+3) (101+1. 05m) | 

\- 1 

Where: 

A = the value coded in the CPRCDS operand of the INTRO macro. 

B = the total number of data bytes located in all option 
fields assigned to stations, lines, or application 
programs. 

C = the sum of the number of single and group entries in the 
Terminal Table. 

D = the number of single, group, and process entries in the 
Terminal Table whose destination queues are maintained on 
disk. 

E = the number of destination queues maintained on disk for 
single, group, and process entries in the Terminal Table. 

F = the number of priority levels specified for each 
destination (assume one priority level for each 
destination queue defined by a PROCESS macro, and Terminal 
macro having no LEVEL operand) . 

G - to 1 if 'I' is specified in the STARTUP operand of the 
INTRO macro, otherwise, G = 0. 

H = the length of an Invitation List (LCOPY macro) . 

J = the length (bytes) of the maximum number of option fields 
assigned to any one entry in the Terminal Table. 

K = to J if J is greater than 32 ; otherwise, K = 32. 

L1= the length of a control record or 30 +3A. 

L2= the length of an environment record or 

22+B+C+4D+5E+(2lF1+22F2+. . . +21Fn) + (G (H1+H2+. ..+Hn)) . 

L3= the length of an incident record or 12 + K. 

L4= the length of a checkpoint request record or 17+21F+J. 

M = the value coded for the CKREQS operand in the INTRO macro. 

N = the number of incident checkpoint records desired (N 
should be between 1 and 255) . 

i . 

Figure 90. Size of the TCAM checkpoint data set. 



132 0S/VS1 storage Estimates 



Work-Space Requirements 

Work-space requirements for IBM-supplied programs depend on either the number of source 
cards or the amount of storage available to the program, or both. These estimates are 
for typical source programs. The following list shows where to find the work space 
requirements for those IBM-supplied programs that require work space: 

• Assembler XF (see Figure 91) . 



1 




r- 


i 


r 






— i 










Number 


of Tracks (Note 


1) I 








Number of 
Source 












Data Set 




2314 


2305-2 


3330 




1 






Cards 


2319 
Disk 


Disk 


Disk 




1 


SYSDT1 




150 


6 


3 


3 










500 


10 


5 


5 










1000 


18 


8 


8 






SYSDT2 




150 


5 


3 


3 










500 


9 


5 


5 




1 






1000 


17 


8 


8 


i 


1 














l 




SYSUT3 




150 


4 


3 


3 










500 


I 6 


4 


4 








< 


1000 


11 


6 


6 






Note 1 . 


These estimates 


are based 


on the 


assumption | 






that 


no macro instructions are used in the | 






source program. 


The storage requirement 


for | 






SYSUT3 increases 


3 when macro instructions 


are | 






used 


and becomes 


3 about equal to the stora 


ge | 






required for SYi 


3UT1 . The 


work-space is a 


ilmost | 






independent of : 


ceal stora< 


je size 


used in 


the | 






assembly. 











Figure 91. Work-space requirement for Assembler XF. 



Estimating the Auxiliary-Storage Requirement 133 



Page of GC24-5094-1, revised by TNL GN24-5463, February 1, 1973 

Appendix A 

Type 3 and 4 SVC Routines 

The following list contains those routines that may be resident when the resident type 3 
and 4 SVC routine option is selected on the CTRL PROG macro at sysgen. All of these 
routines reside on the SVC library. Those module names followed by -SL are the modules 
loaded when the IBM-supplied standard list IEARSVOO is used. All module names on the 
standard list IEARSVOO reside in the SYS1 .PARMLIB of the generated system. The modules 
on this list are also contained in the pageable supervisor space, limited to four 
segments (256K bytes) per megabyte of defined virtual storage. 



WARNING; 

A system with only one megabyte of virtual storage may not run with the full default 
standard list. If a 1-megabyte IPL cannot be performed, increase the virtual 
storage to two megabytes, or reduce the size of the RAM or RSVC lists. 

The IBM standard list IEARSV01 (also a member of SYS1. PARMLIB) contains entries 
specified on sysgen SVCLIB macro (RESIDENT=) . For information on resident routine 
options; refer to OS/VS 1 Planning and Use Guide listed in the Prefa ce. Figure 92 is 
provided to aid the user in recording his system reguirements. 



134 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Routine 



Standard List 
IEARSVOO 
(Note 1) 



Standard List 
IEARSV01 
(Note 2) 



ABEND SVC 13 

ABEND SVC (DAR) . 

ABDOMP SVC 51 

ASC II SVC 67 

BTAM SVC 66 

CHKPT SVC 63 . . 

CLOSE Executors 

DADSM 

Catalog management routines . . 

DADSR SVC 82 .... 

Display Unit status 

Graphics 

IEBTCRIN 

IEHATLAS SVC 86 

JES Request SVC 

OLTEP SVC 59 

OPEN/CLOSE/EOV 

OPEN Executors for ISAM .... 
OPEN Executors for BDAM .... 
OPEN Executors for BIS AM only . 
OPEN Executors for QISAM only . 
OPEN Executors for Graphics . . 
OPEN Executors for BTAM . . . . 
OPEN Executors for SAM .... 
OPEN Executors for TCAM .... 

Operator SVC 7 2 

MGCR SVC 34 

Set PRT SVC 81 

STAE SVC 60 

TCAM SVC 104 

TCLOSE SVC 23 

VOLSTAT SVC 91 

Restart SVC 52 . 

1287/1288 optical reader. . . . 
Miscellaneous SVC routines. . . 

TOTAL REQUIREMENT 



4208 



6880 

15,360 

2992 



52,904 

5224 
1024 



20, 512 

848 
4632 



9072 



123,656 



Notes: 

1. This sum is required to calculate the size of the pageable 
control program. Figure 6. 

2. Space is provided for the user to enter his requirements for 
future references. 



I Figure 92. Total storage requirement for Type 3 and 4 SVC routines, 



Appendix A 135 



ABEND - SVC 13 



| IGC0001C-SL 
IGC0101C 

IGC0201C 

IGC0301C 

IGC0401C 
IGC0501C 

IGC0601C 
IGC0701C 
IGC0801C 
IGC0901C 

| IGC0A01C 

| IGC0B01C-SL 

IGC0C01C 
IGC0D01C 
| IGC0E01C-SL 



ABEND Control Module 
ABEND Abnormal Purge 

Processing 
ABEND I/O Purge 

Processing 
ABEND Validity Check 

Processing 
ABEND Routing Module 
ABEND Dump Data Set 

Processing 
ABEND Snap Processing 
ABEND Job Step Task End 
ABEND Indicative Dump 
ABEND Recursion 

Processing 
ABEND Steal Core 

Processing 
ABEND HTO Purge 

Processing 
ABEND Subtask Processing 
ABEND DEQ for Subtasks 
ABEND Subtask Processing 



1408 
1192 

1208 

680 
1064 

944 
1824 

640 
1104 

880 

1040 

568 

664 

1760 



TOTAL SVC 13 



ABEND SVC 13 (DAR) 
IGC0 221C 
IGC0321C 



Rrites core image 
dump 

Attempts to reinstate 
recursive ABENDS and 
failing permanently 
resident system tasks 



ABDDMP - SVC 51 



TOTAL SVC 13 (DAR) 



916 
94 



IGC0005A 
IGC0105A 
IGC0205A 
IGC0305A 
IGC0405A 
IGC0505A 
IGC0A05A 
IGC0B05A 
IGC0C05A 
IGC0D05A 
IGC0E05A 
IGC0F05A 
IGC0G05A 
IGC0H05A 
IGC0I05A 
IGC0J05A 
IGC0K05A 



ABDOMP 
ABDOMP 
ABDUMP 
ABDOMP 
ABDUMP 
ABDDMP 
ABDUMP 
ABDUMP 
ABDUMP 
ABDUMP 
ABDUMP 
ABDUMP 
ABDUMP 
ABDUMP 
ABDUMP 
ABDUMP 
ABDUMP 



Processing 
Processing 
Processing 
Processing 
Processing 
Processing 
Processing 
Processing 
Processing 
Processing 
Processing 
Processing 
Processing 
Processing 
Processing 
Processing 
Processing 



1664 

1128 

1072 

840 

648 

1264 

1296 

656 

104 

888 

1088 

432 

856 

832 

520 

952 

1584 



TOTAL SVC 51 



ASCII - SVC 67 



IGC0010C 



ASCII/EBCDIC/ASCII 
Translate 



640 



TOTAL SVC 67, 



136 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



MGCR - SVC 34 



IGC0003D-SL 

IGC0006H 

IGC0303D 

IGC0403D-SL 

IGC0503D 

IGC0603D 

IGC0903D 

IGC110 3D 

IGC1203D-SL 

IGC1303D 

IGC1403D 

IGC1503D 

IGC1603D 

IGC1803D 

IGC1903D 

IGC1B03D 

IGC2303D 

IGC2903D 

IGC3203D 

IGC3303D 

IGC3503D-SL 

IGC3703D 

IGC4303D 

IGC4403D 

IGC4503D 

IGC4603D 

IGC4703D 

IGC4903D 



IGC5703D 
I IGC6503D 
IGC9703D 
IGC9803D 
IGC9903D 
IGCXE03D 



Chain Manipulator 784 

Statistics update - SVC 68 1024 

Command router 778 

Command routine 1392 

Message module 1376 

SET Command Processor 1180 

Set Time of Day Processor 404 

VARY/ONLOAD Command Processor 1344 

Reply Processor Routine (MCS) 1496 

TCAM Command Scheduler 400 

HALT END OF DAY Processor 1000 

CRJE Command Processor 576 

Log/Writelog Processor 82 

DEFINE Command Processor 1024 

START/MOONT Processor 1138 

Reply Message Routine (MCS) 368 

SMF Processor 960 

DISPLAY REQOESTS Processor 996 

VARY Router 384 

VARY Command Processor 586 

DISPLAY/MONITOR Processor 960 

CANCEL Processor 652 

VARY MSTCONS (MCS) 472 

Vary Keyword Scan (MCS) 1924 

STOP/MODIFY Command Processor 1206 

VARY ONLINE/OFFLINE of 604 

Console (MCS) 

Process VARY HARDCPY 1716 

Command (MCS) 

Process VARY CONSOLE 1728 

Command (MCS) 

VARY Hardcopy Processor 556 

NS SET Command Handler 1952 

Message module 556 

Set Spool Processor 1024 

Write Command Processor 1288 

Display Consoles Processor 1044 

Processor 1 044 



TOTAL SVC 34 



Command Processors - SVC 109 



IGX00000 Define Command Processor 880 

IGX00001 Define Command Processor 1674 

IGX00002 Define Command Processor 1592 

IGX00003 Define Command Processor 864 

IGX00004 HOLD Command Processor 1396 

IGX00009 SET Command Initialization 736 

IGX01000 Define Command Processor 1580 

IGX01004 DISPLAY/QUEUE ALTER Processor 668 

J IGX02000 Define Command Processor 1348 

IGX02004 Release Command Processor 948 

IIGX03000 Define Command Processor 1848 

IGX03004 ALTER Command Processor 1110 

IGX04000 Define Command Processor 1224 

IGX04004 ALTER Command Processor 653 

IGX05004 Cancel Command Processor 1376 

IGX06004 Cancel/restart Command Processor 1332 



TOTAL SVC 109 



Appendix A 137 



BTAM - SVC 
| IGC0006F 
IGC0106F 
IGC0206F 
IGC0306F 
IGC0406F 
IGC0506F 
IGC0606F 
IGC0706F 

IGC0806F 
IGC0906F 

IGC0A06F 

IGCOB06F 
IGC0C06F 
IGCOD06F 
IGC0E06F 
IGC0F06F 
IGC1006F 
IGC1106F 
IGC1206F 
IGC1306F 
IGC1406F 



66 



Start/Stop Control Hodule 1024 

1030 Terminal Test 842 

1050 Terminal Test 810 

1060 Terminal Test 918 

2740 Terminal Test 866 
2848/2260 Terminal Test 857 
2848/2260 Terminal Test 486 
BSC (USASCII/TFANSCODE) 

Test Module 712 

BSC (EBCDIC) Test Module 944 
27 41 Correspondence Code 

Terminal Test 778 

2741 PTTC Code Terminal 

Test 778 

2760 Terminal Test 360 

2740C Online Test Module 914 

BSC Test Control Module 664 

3270 EBCDIC Test Module 1024 

3270 EBCDIC Test Module 1024 

Remote 3270 ASCII Test Module 1024 

Remote 3270 ASCII Test Module 1024 

Local 3270 Test Control Module 1024 

3270 EBCDIC Test Module 1024 

3270 EBCDIC Test Module 1024 



TOTAL BTAM SVC 66 



Operator Communications - SVC 72 

IGC0007B-SL Router Module 48 

IGC0107B-SL Input/Output to 1052 Console 800 

IGC0907B Message Buffer Writer 1024 

(MCS) 

IGC0I07B Open 1052 Console 992 

IGC1107B Input from Card Reader Console 664 

IGC1I07B Open Card Reader as Console 1008 

IGC2107B Output from Printer Console 840 

IGC2I07B Open Printer as Console 840 

IGC3107B OPEN/CLOSE Routine (MCS) 985 

IGC5107B Router Module 1 1024 

IGC5207B Write WTOs 1 1024 

IGC5307B Splits WTO's 1024 

IGC5407B Handles CANCEL and Command Entry 1024 

IGC5607B Processes Deletion of Messages 1024 

IGC5707B Handles DOM 1024 

IGC5807B Handles Deletion of Messages 1024 

IGC5907B Removes Messages 1024 

IGC5A07B Sets KS options 1024 

IGC5C07B Handles Asynchronous Errors 1024 

IGC5D07B Message Module 1 Control 1024 

IGC5E07B MSG. Module 2 1024 

IGC5F07B Handles Light Pen and 1024 

Cursor Interrupts 

IGC5G07B OPEN/CLOSE 1024 

IGC5J07B ROLL Mode 1024 

IGC5K07B Timer Interpreter 1024 

IGC5P07B 2250 - I/O 1 1024 

IGC5Q07B 2250 - I/O 2 1024 

IGC5R07B 2260 - I/O 1 1024 

IGC5U07B 3277 I/O Routine 1 1024 

IGC5V07B 3277 I/O Routine 2 1024 

IGC5W07B 3284/3286 Processor 1024 

IGC5Z07B Router Module 2 1024 

IGC6107B Transient DCM Handler 1 352 

IGC6207B Write WTO's 2 1024 

IGC6A07B PFK Handler 1 872 

IGC6B07B PFK Handler 2 1088 



138 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



IGC6D07B 
IGC6G07B 

IGC6I07B 
IGC6M07B 
IGC6N07B 
IGC6007B 
IGC6P07B 
IGC6Q07B 
IGC6R07B 
IGC6T07B 
IGC6Z07B 
IGCXL07B 
IGCXM07B 
IGCXN07B 
IGCXO07B 



Message Module 
Cleans Up afte 
Status Change 
Status Display 
Status Display 
Status Display 
Status Display 
Status Display 
Status Display 
2260 - I/O 2 
Status Display 
Transient DCM 
Console Switch 
Console Switch 
Console Switch 
Console Switch 

TOTAL SVC 72 



3 


472 


r Device 


1024 


Handler 1 


1024 


Handler 2 


1008 


Handler 3 


792 


Handler 4 


1056 


Handler 5 


1006 


Handler 6 


1048 




1024 


Handler 7 


1024 


Handler 2 


1024 


Handler 


1160 


Routine (MCS) 


1000 


Routine (MCS) 


1016 


Routine (MCS) 


1016 



Display Unit Status 

IGCU103D Unit Status Syntax Check 

IGCU203D Unit Status UCB Scan 

IGCU303D Unit Status Data Cell Scan 

and Exit 
IGCU403D Unit Status UCB Search and 

Write-to-Operator 



1024 
1024 
1024 

1024 



TOTAL DISPLAY UNIT 



DADSM Functions 

IGC0002G Obtain 

IGC0002I Scratch Initialization 

IGC0003* Rename Initialization 

IGC0003B-SL Allocate Initialization 

IGC0007H LSPACE Initialization 

and Input Validation 
IGC0009H Protect Initialization 
IGC0107H LSPACE Available space 

Totaling SMF Record 19 

and Message Processing 
IGC0109H Protect Reguest 

Processing 
IGC0209H Protect DSCB Updating 
IGG020D1 Release F5 DSCB Updating 
IGG020P1 Release Initialization 

and F1 DSCB Updating 
IGG020P2 Release F3 DSCB Updating 
IGG020P3 Release F4 DSCB Updating 
IGG0290A-SL Scratch Password 

protection interface 
IGG0290B-SL Scratch F6 DSCB 

Updating, Split-cylinder 

reguests 
IGG0290C-SL Scratch F5 DSCB Updating 
IGG0290D-SL Scratch F4 DSCB Updating 
IGG0290E-SL Scratch Mount Message 

Building 
IGG0290F-SL Scratch Volume Mounting 

and Verification 
IGG0299A-SL Scratch DSCB Removal 
IGG029R1-SL RPS Set-up Module 
IGG03001 Rename F1 DSCB Updating 
IGG03002 Rename Volume Mounting 
and verification 



1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 

936 
1024 



1088 

1024 
1024 
1024 

1024 
1024 
1024 

1024 



1024 
1024 
1024 

1024 

1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 



| *• Punch a 12-0 multipunch. In EBCDIC, the 12-0 is a blank; in BCD, a guestion mark (?) . 



Appendix A 139 



IGG03003 Rename SMF Record Type 1024 

18 Processing 
IGG0325A-SL Allocate Duplicate F1 1024 

DSCB Search 
IGG0325B-SL Non-ISAM Allocate 1024 

Request Conversion 
IGG0325C Non-ISAM Allocate 1024 

Absolute Track 

Processing 
IGG0325D-SL Non-ISAM Allocate 1024 

Available Space Search 
IGG0325E-SL Non-ISAM Allocate F1/F3 1024 

Build, Non-split cylinder 

Requests 
IGG0325F Non-ISAM Allocate P6 1024 

DSCB Creating and 

Updating 
IGG0325G-SL Non-ISAM Allocate 1024 

F5 DSCB Updating 
IGG0325H-SL Non-ISAM Allocate F4 1024 

DSCB Updating and Error 

Handling 
IGG0325J Non-ISAM Allocate 1024 

Split-cylinder Processing, 

Drum Device 
IGG0325K Non-ISAM Allocate User 1024 

Label Extent Allocation 
IGG0325L Non-ISAM Allocate 1024 

Split-cylinder Processing, 

Non-drum Device 
IGG0325M Non-ISAM Allocate 1024 

Suballocation: Complete 

F1 DSCBs 
IGG0325P DOS VTOC Conversion 1024 

Non-split-cylinder 

Data Set Processing 
IGG0325Q DOS VTOC Conversion 1024 

Find Split-cylinder 

Data Set Extents 
IGG0325R DOS VTOC Conversion 1024 

Multiple F5 and F6 
DSCB Processing 
IGG0325S Non-ISAM Allocate 1024 

Suballocation: Find 

F1 DSCB, Build Extents 
IGG0325T DOS VTOC Conversion F5 1024 

DSCB Conversion, F4 

DSCB Updating 
IGG0325U DOS VTOC Conversion 1024 

Build F6 DSCBs 
IGG0325V DOS VTOC Conversion 1024 

Check for F6 Extent 

Overlap 
IGG0325R DOS VTOC Conversion 1024 

Convert F6 Extents 
IGG0325Z DOS VTOC Conversion 1024 

Initialization 
IGG032I1 ISAM Allocate Validity ' 1024 

Checking 
IGG032I2 ISAM Allocate Available 1024 

Space search 
IGG032I3 ISAM Allocate Building 1024 

F1, F2, and F3 DSCBs 
IGG032I4 ISAM Allocate Update 1024 

an existing F1 DSCB 
IGG032I5 ISAM Allocate Embedded 1024 

Index Processing 
IGG032I6 ISAM Allocate F5 DSCB 1024 



140 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



IGG032I7 



IGG032I8 



IGG0553A 
IGG0553B 

IGG0553C 

IGG0553D 
IGG0553E 



Updating 
ISAM Allocate F4 DSCB 

Updating and Error 

Handling 
ISAM Allocate 

Multivolume Data Set 

Initialization 
Extend Initialization 
Extend Available Space 

Search 
Extend F1/F3 DSCB 

Build/Update 
Extend F5 DSCB Updating 
VTOC (F4) DSCB Updating 



1024 



1024 



1024 
1024 

1024 

1024 
1024 



TOTAL DADSM Modules. 



Catalog Management 



IGC0002F 
IGC0002H 

IGG0CLCA 

IGG0CLCB 

IGG0CLC0 

IGG0CLC1 

IGG0CLC2-SL 

IGG0CLC3 

IGG0CLC4 
IGG0CLC5 
IGG0CLC6 
IGG0CLC7-SL 

| IGG0CLF2-SL 



Catalog Controller 1450 

Open S extend catalog 968 

data set 

Catalog Controller 1650 

Catalog Controller 1550 

Initialization of OS/VS Catalog 1024 

Relative GDG & alias 1116 

Second load of locate 1040 

Update initialization & 952 

entry building 

Entry building 984 

First load of update 984 

Second load of update 1116 

Second load of update & 1032 

cleanup 

Format BPAM & catalog 920 

data set 



Restart - 


SVC 52 




IGC0005B 


Initialization 


1418 


IGC0205B 


Builds Channel Program/ 
Positions Checkpoint 
Data Set 


674 


IGC0505B 


Restores Problem Program 
Core and Rebuilds 
System Information 


1904 


IGC0605B 


Rebuilds System 
Information 


304 


I IGC0G05B 


JFCB Processor - Table 
Build 


558 


IGC0G95B 


JFCB Processor - Table 
Build 


1055 


IGC0H05B 


Dummy Data Set 
Processors 


968 


IGC0I05B 


JFCB Processor - Table 
Completion 


408 


IGC0J05B 


TCAM Processor 


354 


IGC0K05B 


Mount/Verification 

Processor - Non-Direct 
Access 


996 


IGC0L05B 


SYSIN/SYSOUT Processor - 
Non-Direct Access 


943 


IGC0M05B 


Mount/Verification 
Processor - Direct 
Access 


1040 



Appendix A 141 



IGC0P05B Positioning - Non-Direct 

Access 
IGC0Q05B SYSIN/SYSODT Processor, 

Direct Access 
IGC0R05B Positioning Direct Access 
IGC0S05B Respositioning in 

Parallel 
IGC0T05B Access Method Processor/ 

Restores I/O 
IGC0U05B DOS Tape Positioning 
IGCOV05B Restart Exit Routine 
IGC0W05B ISAM plus BDAH Data Set 

Positioning 



670 

392 

1072 
984 

1272 

840 
928 
928 



CLOSE Executors 




IGG0201A- 


-SL 


SAH - Close Executor for 








Non-Direct Access Devices 


1024 


IGG0201B 




SAH 


1024 


IGG020IN- 


•SL 


Close executor for JAM 


1760 


IGG0201X- 


-SL 


SAM - CLOSE Executors 








for non-DA devices 


1024 


IGG0201Y- 


-SL 


Release Work Areas and 








Buffers (D.A.) 


1024 


IGG0201Z- 


-SL 


SAM/PAM - Close 

Executor for Direct 








Access Devices 


1024 


IGG0202A 




BISAM - Purge, Free 








Buffers 


1024 


IGG0202D 




BISAM - Free Work Area 


1024 


IGG0202I 




QISAM - Flush Buffers, 








Indices 


1024 


IGG0202J 




QISAM - Write EOF 


1024 


IGG0202K 




QISAM - Calculate for 








Padding 


1024 


IGG0202L 




QISAM - Pad Track Index 


1024 


IGG0202H 




QISAM - Pad High-Lev el 








Indices 


1024 


IGG02028 




QISAM Load 


1024 


IGG02029 




QISAM Close 


1024 


IGG0203A- 


-SL 


BDAM 


1024 


IGG0203H 




BTAH 


1024 


IGG0203X 




Graphics 


1024 


IGG0203Y 




Graphics 


1024 



TOTAL Close Executors.... 



CLOSE-TCAH 

IGG02030 
IGG02035 
IGG02036 
IGG02041 
IGG02046 
IGG02047 



Disk Close 1024 

Line Close 1024 

Line Close 2048 

Checkpoint Close 1024 

Hessage Processing Queues Open 1024 

Hessage Processing Queues Close 1024 



TOTAL CLOSE TCAH. 



142 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



TCLOSE - SVC 23 



IGC0002C 



Initial Load 



1520 



STAE - SVC 


60 




IGC0006»- 


Create or modify a STAE 
Environment 


336 


| IGC0111C 


Schedule STAE Exit 

Routine and Test Retry 
Option 


1088 


IGC0211C 


Data Set Closing 


856 


IGC0311C 


Schedule STAE Retry 
Routine 


712 


IGC0411C 


Data Set closing for 
ISAM, BTAM and QTAM 


720 



Graphics 

IGC0007A 

IGC0007C 
IGC0007D 
IGC0007E 
IGC0107A 

IGC0107C 
IGC0107D 
IGC0207A 



| IEBTCRIN 

| IGE0011A 
IEBTCRIN 
IEBTCR02 
IEBTCR03 

IEBTCR04 
| IEBTCR05 



Buffer Management 

(SVC71) 
SPAR (SVC73) 
DAR (SVC74) 
DEQDEOE (SVC75) 
Buffer Management 

(SVC71) 
SPAR (SVC73) 
DAR (SVC74) 
Buffer Management 

(SVC71) 



TOTAL Graphics. 



2495 ERP 

Driver module 

Message module 

Job file control block 

analyzer 
Control card analyzer 
Read/edit module 



904 

752 
792 
632 
912 

392 
608 
804 



992 
4044 
1082 

92 8 
3046 
4654 



TOTAL IEBTCRIN. 



CHKPT - SVC 63 



IGC0006C Initialization 

IGC0106C Environment Checking 

IGC0206C Builds CHR 

IGC0506C Quiesces I/O 

IGC0A06C Writes CHR on Checkpoint 

Data Set 
IGC0D06C Writes DSDRs on 

Checkpoint Data Set 
IGC0F06C Writes CIRs and SUR 

on Checkpoint Data set 
IGC0N06C Restores I/O 
IGC0Q06C Clean Up 
| IGC0S06C Issues console command 



656 
920 
456 
1024 
320 

1136 

1064 

1024 
728 
576 



1 Punch a 12-0 multipunch. In EBCDIC, the 12-0 is a blank; in BCD, a guestion mark (?) 



Appendix A 143 



TOTAL SVC 63 



SETPRT - SVC 81 

TGC0008A OCS Load Determination 
IGG08101 UCS Image Retrieval 
IGG08102 DCS Load and 

Verification 
IGG08103 FCB Retrieval 
IGG08104 FCB Load and 

Verification 



TOTAL SVC 81 



DASDR - SVC 82 

IGC0008B 

IGC0108B 
IGG019P8 
IGG019P9 
IGC0208B 
IGC0308B 



Builds DEBs For New 

Direct Access Volumes 

Assigns Alternate Tracks 

Modifies Extent Limits 

Abnormal END 

Updates UCRs 

Assigns Dynamic 

Alternate Track On 2305 



TOTAL SVC 82 



IEHATLAS + ATLAS (SVC 86) 



IGC0008F 
IGG0860A 
IGG0860B 
IGG0860C 

IGG0860D 
IGG086AE 



Get Address Of Alternate 

Track 
Reads Format 4 DSCB & 

Build Channel Program 
Execute Channel Program 

For Error Track 
Obtain Storage For 

Largest Record On 

Error Track 
Transfer Records From 

Error To Alternate Track 
Chain Alternate To 

Primary Tracks 



TOTAL SVC 86 



JES Reguest SVC Module 

IFGAZ016 SVC Interface to JES 

TOTAL JES SVC Modules.. 



OPEN/CLOSE/EOV 
IGC0001I-SL 

IGC0002B 

IGC0002C 
IGC0002 a --SL 

IGC0003A 

IGC0005E-SL 

IGG0200F 

IGG02006 

IFG0190P 



Modules 
Open Initial Function 

(OPEN and OPEN TYPE=J) 
Open Initial Function 

(OPEN and OPEN TYPE=J) 
TCLOSE Initial Function 
CLOSE Initialization 

Function 
FEOV Executor Function 
EOV Executor Function 
Alias for IFG0200X 
Alias for IFG0200X 
ABEND Interpretation 

and Recovery 



1024 
1024 
1024 

1024 
1024 



1024 

1016 
352 
256 
672 
456 



1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 

1024 
1024 



440 



1224 

920 

1520 
1472 

1136 
1152 
1024 
1024 
1024 



| *• Punch a 12-0 multipunch. In EBCDIC, the 12-0 is a blank; in BCD, a guestion mark (?) 



144 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



IFG0190R 

IFG0193A-SL 

IFG0193B-SL 

IFG0193C 

IFG0193D 

IFG0193E 

IFG0194A 

IFG0194C 

IFG0194D 
IFG0194E-SL 

IFG0194F-SL 

IFG0194G 

IFG0194H-SL 

IFG0194I-SL 

IFG0194J 

IFG0195A-SL 

IFG0195B-SL 

IFG0195C-SL 

IFG0195D 

| IFG0195E 

IFG0195G 

IFG0195H-SL 

IFG0195J-SL 

IFG0195K-SL 

| IFG0195M 
IFG0195N 

| IFG01950 
IFG0195P 



Initialization 

Function 
Display DSNAME HTO 1024 

Function 
OPEN Initial Volume 1384 

Serial Function 
Open Tape Initial 1024 

Function 
Open Tape Label Editor 1024 

Function 
Open Tape Destroy Label 1024 

Function 
Open Tape Create Label 1024 

Function 
Open Direct Access 1136 

Volume Verification 

Function 
Open Direct Access 1024 

Volume Verification 

Function 
Open Tape Volume 1024 

Reference Function 
Open Direct Access Onit 1024 

Selection 
Open Direct Access Read 

DSCB Function 
Open Tape Mount 1024 

Verification Function 
Open Tape Volume 1024 

Mounting Function 
Open Tape Volume 1024 

Verification Function 
Open Tape Final Common 1024 

Function 
Open Tape Label Editor 1024 

Interface Function 
Open Direct Access Read 1024 

DSCB Function 
Open Tape Standard Label 1024 

Positioning Function 
Open Tape No Label 1024 

Positioning Function 
Open Tape Nonstandard 1024 

Label Input Interface 

Function 
Open Direct Access 1086 

DISP=MOD Error Recovery 

Function 
Open Direct Access 1024 

Expiration Date Error 

Function 
Open Tape Standard Label 1024 

INPUT/MOD Header Label 1 

Function 
Open Direct Access Read 1024 

SDCB to JFCB Merge 

Function 
Open Tape Standard Label 1024 

INP0T/MOD Header 

Label 2 Function 
Open Direct Access BPAM 1168 

Concatenation Function 
Open Tape Standard Label 1024 

Input User Label Function 
Open Direct Access 1200 

Parallel Mounting Function 
Open Direct Access 1024 

Parallel Mounting 



Appendix A 145 



I IFG0195T 
IFG0195U 
IFG0196J-SL 
IFG0196K 
IFG0196L-SL 

IIFG0196H-SL 
IFG0196N-SL 

IFG01960 

IIFG0196Q-SL 
IFG0196T-SL 

IFG0196U 

IFG0196V-SL 

IFG0196W-SL 

IFG0196X-SL 
IFG0197A-SL 

IFG0198N-SL 

IFG0199B 

IFG0199D 

IFG0199E 

IFG0199R 

| IFG019TR 
IFG0200P 

| IFG0200V-SL 
IFG0200W-SL 
IFG0200X-SL 
IFG0200Y-SL 
IFG0200Z-SL 
IFG0201R-SL 
IFG0202A 



Function 
Open Security 1208 

Initialization Function 
Open Security Search 1021 

Function 
Open Merge JFCB to 1 024 

DCB Function 
Open Merge JFCB to DCB 1021 

Function 
Open Merge DCB Exit 1021 

Function 
Open Merge DCB to JFCB 1136 

Function 
Open Tape Standard 1021 

Label Output Security 

Function 
Open Tape Nonstandard 1021 

Label Output Interface 

Function 
Open Tape Standard Label 1021 

Date Protection Function 
Open Tape Standard Label 1021 

Rewrite Volume Label 

Function 
Open Tape Standard 1021 

Label Output User Label 

Function 
Open Access Method 1 021 

Executor Determination 

Function 
Open Access Method 1112 

Executor Return Function 
Open Final EXCP 1021 

Open Access Method 1021 

Executor Return Function 
Open Final SYSOUT LIMIT 1112 

Function 
ABEND Interpretation and 1021 

Recovery Write-to- 

Programmer Function 
ABEND Interpretation and 1112 

Recovery ABEND Trace 

Function 
ABEND Interpretation and 1192 

Recovery ABEND Exit 

Function 
Optional Module Trace 1021 

Initialization/Termination 

Function 
Optional Module Trace 368 

Function 
ABEND Interpretation and 1021 

Recovery Initialization 

Function 
Close Initialization 1181 

Function 
Close Unit Record/ 1021 

Teleprocessing Function 
Close Access Method 1021 

Executor Return Function 
Close Unit Record/ 1296 

Teleprocessing Function 
Close Tape Standard 1021 

Trailer Label Function 
Close Direct Access 1021 

Input Oser Labels Function 
Close Tape Standard User 1021 

Label Function 



146 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



IFG0202B 
IFG0202C 

IFG0202D 
IFG0202E-SL 

IIFG0202F-SL 
IFG0202G-SL 
IFG0202H 

IFG0202I 

IIFG0202J-SL 
IFG0202K-SL 
IFG0202L-SL 
IFG0230P 

| IFG0232D-SL 
IFG0232G 
IFG0232J 

IFG0232M 

IFG0232S 

| IFG0232Z-SL 
IFG0550P 

| IFG0551B 
IFG0551D 
IFG0551F-SL 
IFG0551H-SL 

IFG0551J 
| IFG0551L 
IFG0551N 
IFG0551P 
IFG0551R 
IFG0551T 
IFG0551V 
IFG0551X 
IFG0551Z 



Close Tape Nonstandard 

Label Function 
Close Direct Access 

Input User Labels 

Function 
Close Direct Access 

User Labels Function 
Close Direct Access 

Write File Mark Function 
Close Tape Volume 

Disposition Function 
Close Tape Volume 

Disposition Function 
Close SMF Data Set 

SMF Record Builder 

Function 
Close SMF Data Set SMF 

Record Builder Function 
Close Final SMF 

Interface Function 
Close Final Restore 

System Function 
Close Final Termination 

Function 
ABEND Interpretation and 

Recovery Initialization 

Function 
TCLOSE Direct Access 

Input Function 
TCLOSE Tape Standard 

Trailer Label Function 
TCLOSE Direct Access 

Output Trailer Label 

Function 
TCLOSE Tape Standard 

Trailer Label Function 
TCLOSE Tape Volume 

Positioning Function 
TCLOSE Final Function 
ABEND Interpretation and 

Recovery Initialization 

Function 
EOV STNAD Executor 

Function 
EOV SYNAD Executor 

Function 
EOV Initial Read JFCB 

Function 
EOV Initial Work Area 

Initialization 

Function 
EOV Initial String 

Determination Function 
EOV Access Method 

Executor Function 
EOV Access Method 

Executor Function 
EOV Tape output Trailer 

Label Function 
EOV Tape Output Trailer 

(EOV 2) 
EOV Tape Output Volume 

Disposition Function 
EOV Tape Output New 

Volume Function 
EOV Tape Output Label 

Verification Function 
EOV Tape Output Label 



1024 
1024 

1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 

1024 
1080 
2032 
1024 
1024 

1024 
1024 
1024 

1024 

1024 

1176 
1024 

1096 
1024 
1400 
1024 

1024 
1160 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 



Appendix A 147 



IFG0552B 
IFG0552D 
IFG0552F 

| IFG0552H 
IFG0552J 

IFG0552L 
IFG0552N 

IFG0552P 

| IFG0552R-SL 

IFG0552T 

IFG0552V 

| IFG0552X-SL 
IFG0552Z 

IFG0553D 

IFG0553F 

IFG0553H 

| IFG0553P-SL 
IFG0553R 
IFG0553T 

| IFG0553V 

IFG0553X 

IFG0553Z 

| IFG0554B 

IFG0554D 

| IFG0554J 
IFG0554L 

IFG0554N 

| IFG0554P 

| IFG0554R 



Verification Function 
EOV Tape Output Label 

Rewrite Function (V0L1) 
EOV Tape Output Label 

Rewrite Function (HDR1) 
EOV Tape Output Label 

Rewrite Function 

(HDR1 r OHL) 
EOV Tape Output Exit 

Function 
EOV Tape Output Label 

Destroy (EMODVOL1) 

Function 
EOV Tape Output Label 

Create Function 
EOV Tape Output Error 

Recovery and Nonstandard 

Labol Function 
EOV Tape Output WTO 

Function 
EOV Tape Input Standard 

Trailer Label Function 
EOV Tape Input standard 

Trailer Label Function 
EOV Tape Input Volume 

Positioning Function 
EOV End-of-Data Function 
EOV Tape Input New 

Volume Mounting Function 
EOV Tape Input New 

Volume Mounting Function 
EOV Tape Input standard 

Header Label Function 
EOV Tape Input Next 

Volume Mounting Function 
EOV Direct Access Input 

Initial Function 
EOV Direct Access Input 

Mount Function 
EOV Direct Access Input 

Mount Function 
EOV Direct Access Input 

Input Mount Ahead 

Function 
EOV Direct Access Input 

DEB Function 
EOV Direct Access Input 

Exit Function 
EOV Direct Access Input 

FEOV Repositioning 

Function 
EOV Direct Access Input 

FEOV Repositioning 

Function 
EOV Direct Access 

Message Function 
EOV Direct Access 

Input User Header/ 

Trailer Label Function 
EOV 2321 and Direct 

Access Output FEOV 

Function 
EOV Direct Access Output 

Get Space Current 

Volume Function 
EOV Direct Access Output, 

GET Current Volume 

Function 



1024 
1024 
1024 

1160 
1024 

1024 
1024 

1024 

1136 

1024 

1024 

1216 
1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 

1192 
1024 
1136 

1024 

1024 
1168 

1024 

1112 

1096 



148 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



IFG0554T EOV Direct Access Output 

B37 Abend Function 
IFG0554V EOV Direct Access Output 

Next Volume Mount 

Function 
IFG0554X EOV Direct Access Output 
IFG0554Z EOV Direct Access Output 

Volume Disposition 
IFG0555B EOV Direct Access Output 

User Trailer Label 

Interface Function 
IFG0555D EOV Direct Access 

Output JFCB Update 

Function 
IFG0555F EOV Direct Access Output 

Read DSCB Function 
IFG0555H EOV Direct Access Output 

Construct DEB Function 
IFG0555J Open Merge Direct Access 

Output User Header Label 

Function 
IGG0193K-SL JES Open Executor 

Function 
IGG0203K-SL JES Close Executor 

Function 
IGC0196M Problem Determination 

IGC0199L-SL Open Executor BDAM 
EMDUSRFF IMDPRDMP Utility 

OPEN/CLOSE/EOV Format 

Appendage 



1096 
102*1 

1024 
1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 
1432 
1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 
1024 
1024 



READPSWD Open Security Read 

Password (READPSHD) 
Function 

SECLOADA Open Security Scratch - 

Rename Interface Function 



920 



984 



TOTAL OPEN/CLOSE/EOV, 
OPEN Executors for ISAM 



IGC0006G SYNADAF (SVC 68) initial 

load 
IGC0009A Volume statistics record 

routine, magnetic tape 
IGC0106H SYNAD routine CSW status 

and CCB Post routine for 

SAM, DAM, and EXCP 
IGC0109A DASD statistics record 
IGG0192A Build DEB 
IGG0192B Buffers 
IGG0192C Buffers add work area 

initialization 
IGG01920 Validate fields in 

format 2 DSCB 
IGG01922 Validate fields in 

format 2 DSCB 
IGC0206H SYNAD routine for BISAM 
IGC0306H SYNAD routine for QISAM 
IGC0406H SYNAD routine for QISAM, 

BTAM, QTAM, and GAM 
IGC0506H Format SYNAD message EXCP 
IGC0606H Format SYNAD message for 

optical readers 
IGC0706H SYNAD routine unit check 

analysis 



1024 

1024 

712 



1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 

1024 

1024 

784 
584 
960 

288 
984 

1000 



Appendix A 149 



TOTAL Open Executors ISAM 
OPEN Executors for SAM 



IIGG0191A-SL 
IGG0191B-SL 
IGG0191C-SL 
IGG0191D-SL 

I 

IGG0191E 

| IGG0191F-SL 

IGG0191G-SL 
IGG0191H 

(IGG0191I-SL 
IGG0191J-SL 

IGG0191K 
IGG0191N-SL 

IGG0191O-SL 

IGG01911-SL 
IGG01912 

IGG01913 
IGG01914 

IGG01915-SL 

IGG01916 



IGGO 
IGGO 

IGGO 
IGGO 
IGGO 
IGGO 
IGGO 
IGGO 
IGGO 
IGGO 
IGGO 
IGGO 
IGGO 
IGGO 
IGGO 
IGGO 
IGGO 
IGGO 
IGGO 
IGGO 



1917-SL 
1918 

1919 

191P 

191Q 

191R 

191S 

191T 

191U 

191V 

191H 

191X 

191Y 

191Z 

1926 

193I-SL 

196A-SL 

196B-SL 

196I-SL 

196J 



IGG0196K 

IGG0196L 

IGG0196P 
IGG0197E 
IGG0197F 
IGG01970 
IGG0199K 
IGG01990 

IGG01991-SL 



DEB Construction - Load 1 1024 

Main Executor - Load 1 1024 

Dummy Executor 1024 

First Load Direct Access 1024 

Executor 

Input Exchange Buffering 1024 

Executor 

Output Exchange Buffering 1024 

Executor 

TAPE and Unit Record Executor 1024 

Record Overflow Executor 1024 

Buffer Construction Executor 1024 

Direct Access IN/OOT and 1024 

OUT/IN 

Direct Access Executor PCI 1 024 

DEB construction for Direct 1024 

Access Devices 

Second Load-Direct Access 1024 

Executor 

IOB and Buffer Construction 1024 

Update Load Executor - Paper 1024 

Tape 

Load Executor PCI/T.O 1024 

Exchange Buffering Load 1024 

Executor 

Load Executor for Variable 1024 

Length Records 

Load Executor for Variable 1024 

Length Records 

Load Executor 1024 

Update Load Executor - Paper 1 024 

Tape 

Load Executor PCI/T.O 1024 

Update Executor 1024 

Tape/Unit Record Executor 1024 

TAPE r Disk IN/OUT executor 1024 

Record Overflow Executor 1024 

UCS Load Determination 1024 

UCS Image Retrieval 1024 

UCS Load 1024 

SAM Stage 2 Executor 1024 

SAM Stage 2 Executor 1024 

Executor for User Totaling 1024 

SAM Stage 2 Executor 1024 

SAM Stage 3 - Open Executor 1024 

Executor Selection 1024 

DEB Construction - Load 2 1024 

Main Executor - Load 2 1024 

DEB Construction 1024 

Open Input Executor 1024 

Exchange Buffer - DA tape 

Open Executor stage 2 1024 

Unit Record 

Open Executor Stage 2 1024 

IOB Finish 

SAM Stage 2 Executor 1024 

FCB Retrieval 1024 

FCB Load and Verification 1024 

UCS Verification 1120 

SAM Stage 2 Executor 1024 

Exchange Buffering Load 1024 

Executor 

Load Executor for Variable 1024 

Length Records 



150 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



IGG01992 Load Executor for Variable 

Length Records 
IGG01993-SL SAM Stage 2 Executor 

TOTAL Open Executors SAM.. 

OPEN Executors for BDAM 

IGG0191L-SL Create BDAM Date Set 

IGG0191M BSAM Load Mode, Record 

Overflow 

IGG0193A-SL Open Executor No. 1 

IGG0193C-SL Open Executor No. 2 

IGG0193E-SL Open Executor No. 3 

IGG0193F Obtain/Format Buffer Area 

| IGG0193G-SL Loads Required BDAM Modules 

TOTAL Open Executors BDAM, 



1024 
1024 



OPEN Executors for BISAM Only 

IGG0192H Move From DSCB, Get 

Work Area 
IGG0192I Load PMT, CP1 or CP2 

IGG0192J Load Appendage, 

Asynchronous 
IGG0192K Load NPMT, Dynamic 

Buffering CP04-CP7 
IGG0192L Load WRITE KN NPMT, 

Channel Programs 
IGG0192M Set-up WRITE KN 

Channel Programs 
IGG0192N Set-up WRITE KN Channel 

Programs 
IGG0192O Set-up WRITE KN Channel 

Programs 
IGG0192P Read HIGH-level Index 

IGG0192Q Set-up WRITE. KN Channel 

Programs 
IGG0192W Move from DSCB to DCB 

work area (VLR) 
IGG0192X Set-up WRITE KN Channel 

Programs (VLR) 
IGG0192Z Set-up WRITE KN Channel 

Programs (VLR) 
IGG01950 Validate Fields in 

Format 2 DSCB (VLR) 
IGG01994 SAM Stage 3 Open Executor 

IGG0199L Create BDAM Spanned Records 

IGG0199O BDAM Search Direct on DA Exec 

IGG0199W-SL SAM-JES Compatibility Interface 

TOTAL OPEN Exec. BISAM... 

OPEN Executors for QISAM Only 

IGG01921 Set Dp Load Mode Work 

Area 
IGG01923 Load (Scan Mode) 

(VLR) 
IGG01924 Set-up Channel Programs 

(VLR) 
IGG01928 Load (Scan Mode) 
IGG01929 Set-up Channel Programs 
IGG0192D Calculations 
IGG0192E Calculations 
IGG0192F Calculations 
IGG0192G Calculations 



1024 
1024 

1024 
1024 
1128 
1024 
1024 



1024 
1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 
1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 



1024 

1024 

1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 



Appendix A 151 



IGG0192R Load, Set-up CP18 

(Write Validity Check) 
IGG0192S Set-up, CP19, Pre-format 

IGG0192T Set-up, CP20, CP21 

(No Write Validity 

Check) 
IGG0192U Load, Set-up CP18 

(Write Validity Check) 
IGG0192V Set-up CP20, CP21 

(Write Validity Check) 
IGG0195D Resume Load 

Initialization 
IGG0195G Resume Load 

I nitia liza ti on 
IGG0195T Full Track Index Write 

Initialization 
IGG0195U Full track with Resume 

Load Initialization 
IGG0196D Resume Load 

Initialization - Set 

Op CP 31 
IGG0196G Resume Load 

Initialization 



1024 
1024 



1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 

1024 
1024 



TOTAL OPEN Exec. QISAM... 

OPEN Executors for Graphics 

IGG0193L Open Executor - Load 3 
IGG0193Y Open Executor - Load 1 
IGG0193Z Open Executor - Load 2 

TOTAL OPEN Exec. Graphics 

OPEN Executors for BTAM 



1024 
1024 
1024 



IGG0193M Open Executor - Load 1 

IGG0193Q Open Executor - Load 2 

IGG0193S Open Executor - Load 3 

IGG0194N Open Executor - Load 4 

IGG0194P Open Executor - Load 3270 

IGG0194Q Open Executor - Load 3270 

TOTAL OPEN Exec. BTAM... 

OPEN Executors for TCAM 



1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 



IGG01930 Disk Open 

IGG01931 Disk Open 

IGG01932 Disk Open 

IGG01933 Open error handler 

IGG01934 Disk Open 

IGG01935 Line Open 

IGG01936 Line Open 

IGG01937 Line Open 

IGG01938 Line Open 

IGG01939 Line Open 

IGG01940 Line Open 

IGG01941 Checkpoint Open 

IGG01942 Checkpoint Open 

IGG01943 Checkpoint Open 

IGG01944 Checkpoint Open 

IGG01945 Checkpoint Open 

IGG01946 Message Processing 

Queues Open 

IGG01947 Message Processing 



1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
2048 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 

2048 



152 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



IGG01948 
IGG01949 



Line Open 
Checkpoint open 



1024 
1024 



| TCAM - SVC 104 
IGC0010D*- 
IGC0110D 
IGC0210D 
IGC0310D 
IGC0410D 
IGC0510D 



TOTAL OPEN Exec. TCAM.... 



Operator Control Control Module - 

Load - SVC 104 
Operator Control Control Module - 

Load 1 
Operator Control Control Module - 

Load 2 
Operator Control Control Module - 

Load 3 
Operator Control Control Module - 

Load 4 
Operator Control Control Module - 

Load 5 



TOTAL TCAM - SVC 104 



| VOL STAT - SVC 91 

| IGC0009A 
IGC0109A 



Magnetic tape logging BTN 
DASD (3330,2305) logging RTN 



990 
936 
1024 
872 
880 
544 



1024 
478 



TOTAL SVC 91, 



*-Note: Only IGC0010D is included at SYSGEN. Other SVC 104 modules are copied when TCAM 
Independent Release is applied. 



Appendix A 153 



Miscellaneous SVC Routines 



| IGC0001F- 


-SL 


Purge (SVC 16) 


1416 


IGC0001G 




Restore 


296 


IGC0002A 




BPAM Store Routine 
(SVC 21) 


1024 


IGC0002B 




OPEN-JFCB in Storage 
(SVC 22) 


1024 


IGC0002E 




D.A. Track Balance 
(SVC 25) 


872 


IGC0003C 




SVC 33 - Halt I/O 


456 


IGC0003E- 


■SL 


WTO/WTOR (SVC 35) 


1232 


IGC0003F 




WTL 


608 


IGC0003I 




Tape ERP 


1024 


IGC0004C 




CIRB (SVC 43) 


176 


IGC0004D 




CHAP (SVC 44) 


296 


IGC0005 




GTF Initialize and Terminates 
(SVC 109 LTA) 


472 


IGC0005C 




RELEX (SVC 53) 


248 


IGC0005G 




FREEDBDF (SVC 57) 


128 


IGC0005I 




SVC 59 - OLTEP 


856 


IGC0006B 




Detach (SVC 62) 


400 


IGC0006D 




Read JFCB 


1024 


IGC0006G 




SYNADAF (SVC 68) Initial Load 


1024 


IGC0006I 




Backspace (SVC 69) 


1000 


IGC0007F 




LOGREC Recorder 


988 


IGC0008C 




SMF WTM (SVC 83) Buffer Control 


832 


IGC0008G 




SVC 87 - Delete 

Operator Messages (MCS) 


220 


IGC0008H 




SVC 88 - Set Emulator Mode 


374 


IGC0101F 




Purge (SVC 16 - Second Load 


1342 


IGC0103E- 


SL 


WTOR Processor (SVC 35) 


896 


IGC0108C 




SMF Data Set 


1094 


IGC019C8 




Write PCI Appendage 


1272 


IGC0201F- 


SL 


Purge (SVC 16 - Third Load) 


1328 


IGC0203E- 


SL 


WTP 


1128 


IGC0208C 




SMF Data Set Verification 


854 


IGC0210A 




SVC 21 BPAM STOW 


1024 


IGC021AB 




SVC 21 BPAM STOW 


1024 


IGC0403 




CIRB (SVC 43) 


176 


IGC0406H 




SYNAD Routine for BISAM 


584 


IGC0406H 
I 




SYNAD Routine for QISAM, 
BTAM, QTAM, and GAM 


960 


IGC0505I 




SVC 59 - OLTEP 


776 


IGC0506H 
I 




Formats Synad Message 
for EXCP 


288 


IGC0605I 




SVC 59 - OLTEP 


784 


IGC0606H 
I 




Formats Synad Message 

for Optical Character Readers 


1024 


IGC0706H 
I 




Synad Routine Unit 
Check Analysis 


704 


| IGC0905I 




SVC 59 - CD TEST SVC 


356 


IGE0100I 






1024 


IGE0200I 






1024 


IGE0300I 






1024 


IGE0400I 






1024 


IGG0198L- 


■SL 


JES Compatability Interface 


1024 


IGG0199F 




JES Compatability Interface 


1024 


IGG0199G- 


■SL 


JES Compatability Interface 


1024 


IGG0201W- 


SL 


JES Compatability Interface 


1024 



154 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



ERROR RECOVERY PROCEDURES 

The following list contains those error recovery procedures that may be made resident 
when the resident error- recovery procedure option is specified on the CTRLPROG macro at 
system generation. For information on the error- recovery option, refer to OS/VS 1 
Planning and Ds e Guide listed in the Preface . All error-recovery routines reside on the 
SVC library. The IBM standard list IEAIGEOO (a member of SYS1.PARMLIB) initially 
contains no error recovery procedure names. The user should enter the total module sizes 
specified for these lists in the space provided in Figure 93. 



1 - — — - - — 1 — 1 

I I Standard List | 
| Routine j Total From | 
| | IEAIGEOO | 














| 1287/1288 optical reader routines . . | | 
| Direct Access Volume Verification . . I I 






| TOTAL REQUIREMENT (Note 1) | | 
l ii 


1 1 

| Note: | 

| 1. The contents of this standard list (and therefore | 
| the total size) can be modified at IPL time. | 



Figure 93. Total storage requirement for error recovery routines. 
Unit Record Device Error Routines 



IGE0000D 1052/2150 ERP (Console) 
IGE0000E 2501/2520/1442 ERP 

(Card reader/punch) 
IGE0000G 1403/1443 ERP (Printer) 
IGE0001A 3505/3525 ERP 
IGE0001C 2540 ERP Load 1 

(Card reader/punch) 
IGE0011C 1287 ERP 
IGE0011D 1288 ERP 
IGE0011E 1419/1275 ERP 
IGE0101C 2540 ERP Load 22 

(Card reader/punch) 



816 
592 

888 

1024 

616 

904 
904 
360 
264 



TOTAL unit record, 



Error Routines Common to all devices 



IGC0003C Halt I/O 

IGC0007F SVC 76 

IGE0025C Write-to-Operator Load 1 

IGE0025D Statistics Update 

IGE0025E I/O Purge 

IGE0025F Outboard Recorder (OBR) 

IGC0105I OLTEP I/O Routine 



208 
988 
720 
832 
376 
992 
488 



Appendix A 155 



IGC0107F SVC 76 

IGE0125C Write-to-Operator Load 

IGE0125F Outboard and Channel 

Check Recorder 
IGC0207F SVC 76 

IGE0225C Write-to-Operator Load 

IGC0307F SVC 76 

IGE0325C Write-to-Operator Load 

IGE0425C* Write-to-Operator Load 

IGE0625F Statistical Data 

Recorder (SDR) 



548 
432 
928 

444 
1024 
760 
952 
984 
432 



♦Loaded for 3330 and 2305 devices only. 
Graphic Routines 

TOTAL common routines.... 



IGE0010A 
IGE0010B 
IGE0110B 



3270 Routines 

IGE0010E 
IGE0110E 



TCAM Routines 

IGE0004G 

IGE0004H 

IGE0104G 

IGE0104H 

IGE0204G 
IGE0204H 
IGE0304F 
IGE0304S 

IGE0404G 



IGE0404H 
IGE0504F 
IGE0504G 

IGE0504H 
IGE0604G 



IGE0804G 

IGE0804H 
IGE0904H 



ERP 2250 

ERP Load 1 2260/1053 

ERP Load 2 2260/1053 



TOTAL Graphics, 



3270 ERP 
3270 ERP 

TOTAL 3270, 



START/STOP ERP 

Translator Module 
BSC ERP Translator 

Module 
Read/Write Unit Check 

Exception 
BSC Equipment Check, 

Lost Data, Intervention 

Required, and Unit 

Exception 
Non-operational Control 

Unit 
BSC Data Check, Overrun 

and Command Reject 
Start/Stop Control 

Module 
Unit Check for Non-read, 

and Non-write and 

Non-Poll CCWs 
Auto Poll and Read 

Response to Poll Unit 

Check and Onit Exception 
BSC CCW Return Module 
BSC Control Module 
Error Post and CCW 

Return 
BSC Error Post Module 
Onit Check and Onit 

Exception for Audio and 

2260 Local Devices 
Start/Stop Channel 

Check 
BSC Channel Check 
OBE/SDR Interface for TPER record 



1024 

1024 

416 



1024 
1024 



480 
480 
816 
910 

776 

970 

1016 

370 

370 



970 

1020 

968 

748 
340 



968 

90 
632 



156 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



IGE0904G Terminal Statistics 
Recording 

TOTAL TCAM routines, 



210 



Error Routines for 2955 



IGE00191 
IGE0119I 



Error Decoder and Recovery 
Error Decoder and Recovery 



872 
872 



TOTAL for 2955, 



Error Routines for 3211 



IGE0000F 
IGE0100F 



ERP LOAD1 
ERP LOAD2 

TOTAL for 3211 



992 
900 



1287/1288 Optical Reader 



IGE0011C 
IGE0011D 
IGG0197A 
| IGG0197B 
IGG019VA 

IGG019VB 

IGG019VC 

IGG019VD 

IGG019VE 
IGG019VF 
IGG019VG 
IGG019VH 
IGG019VI 
IGG019VJ 
| IGG019VK 



1287 ERP 

12 88 ERP 

OPEN State II 

OPEN Stage III 

GET locate mode, fixed 

records 
Get locate mode, variable 

or undefined records 
Get move mode, fixed 

records 
Get move mode, variable 

or undefined records 
SYNCH module 
READ module 
CHECK module 
CNTRL module 
RDLNE module 
DSPLY module 
RESCN module 



TOTAL 1287/1288, 



Page File Error Recovery 

IGE0000B Page File Error Routine 

Direct Access Volume Verification 



IGE0125E 
IGE0225E 



DAW Load 1 
DAW Load 2 



992 

904 

1024 

1023 

312 

408 

376 

456 
880 
136 
818 
864 
232 
472 
592 



264 



496 
888 



TOTAL for DAW, 
DASD Error Recovery 
IGE0000A 

TOTAL DASD.. ... 



Tape Error Recovery 

I IGE0000I Tape ERP 

IGE0100I Tape ERP 

IGE0200I Tape ERP 

IGE0300I Tape ERP 

IGE0400I Tape ERP 



1016 



1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 



Appendix A 157 



I IGE0800I 
IGE0900I 



Tape ERP 
Tape ERP 



1024 
1024 



TOTAL Tape. 



BTAM Error Recovery 

IGE0004A Start/Stop ERP Control 544 

IGE0004B Start/Stop ERP Data Check 408 

IGE0004C BSC ERP Control 640 

IGE0104A Start/Stop ERP Data Check 536 

IGE0104B Start/Stop ERP Diagnostic 328 

Write/Read 

IGE0104C BSC ERP Data Check 376 

IGE0204A Start/Stop ERP Timeout 552 

IGE0204B ERP Line Error Recording 408 

IGE0204C BSC ERP Error Post 960 

IGE0304A Start/Stop ERP Intervention 560 

Required 

IGE0304B Start/Stop ERP Unit Exception 696 

IGE0304C BSC ERP Intervention 360 

Required 

IGE0404A Start/Stop ERP Lost Data 400 

IGE0404B Start/Stop ERP Read Skip Write 512 

Break 

IGE0404C BSC ERP Timeout 768 

IGE0504A Start/Stop ERP Post 656 

IGE0504B Start/Stop ERP Overrun 416 

IGE0504C BSC ERP Special Return 944 

IGE0604A Start/Stop ERP Bus Out 312 

Error Check 

IGE0604B ERP Intervention Required 248 

Message Writer 

IGE0604C BSC ERP Lost Data 432 

IGE0704A Start/Stop ERP Read Skip 416 

Write Break 

IGE0704B Remote 3270 Error Post 1024 

IGE0704C BSC ERP Bus Out S Overrun 408 

IGE0804A Start/Stop ERP Status Check 176 

IGE0804B ERP Channel Check & Interface 592 

Control Check 

IGE0804C BSC ERP Equipment Check & 488 

Command Reject 

IGE0904A Start/Stop ERP Control 248 

IGE0904C BSC ERP Onit Exception 980 



TOTAL BTAM. 



158 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



APPENDIX B 



ACCESS METHOD MODULES 



The following list contains the access method modules that may be resident in any 
configuration when the resident reenterable load module option is selected at sysgen 
(CTRLPROG macro) . For information on the resident routine option, refer to S/VS1 
Planning and Use Guide listed in the Preface . All of these routines are located in the 
SVC Library. Those module names followed by -SL are loaded when the IBM-supplied 
standard list IEAIGGOO is used. All module names on the standard list IEAIGOO reside in 
the SYS1.PARMLIB of the generated system. The modules on this list are also contained in 
the pageable supervisor space, limited to four segments (256K bytes) per megabyte of 
defined virtual storage. 



WARNING ; 

A system with only one megabyte of virtual storage may not run with the full default 
standard list. If a 1-megabyte IPL cannot be performed, increase the virtual 
storage to two megabytes, or reduce the size of the RAM or RSVC lists. 



Figure 94 aids you in determining the to tal storage for Access Method Routines reguired 
to calculate the size of the pageable control program. Figure 6. 



Routine 



fflG C46LE 

Standard List 
IEAIGGOO 



FfX£X> 

Standard List 
IEAIGG01 



Standard List 
IEAIGG02 



Standard list 
IEAIGG03 



BDAM 

BSAM/QSAM Common. . . . 

BSAM 

QSAM Simple Buffering . 
QSAM Exchange Buffering 
BSAM/QSAM for 3211. . . 

BISAM 

QISAM 

BTAM 

Graphics 

JAM 

TCAM 

TOTAL REQUIREMENT 



5400 
2184 
3200 



3232 



14016 



| Figure 94. Total storage requirement for Access Method Modules. 

BASIC DIRECT ACCESS METHOD MODULES 

IGG019JA Dynamic buffering 1112 

Virtual, Non-spanned 
IGG019JB Dynamic buffering, 1152 



Dynamic buffering 

Virtual, Non-spanned 
Dynamic buffering. 

Virtual Spanned 

Spanned 
IGG019KA FOUNDATION MODULE, 

NON-SPANNED 
IGG019KC RELATIVE TRACK 

IGG019KE RELATIVE BLOCK 

IGG019KF CONVERT RELATIVE BLOCK 

IGG019KG BLOCK FEEDBACK 

IGG019KH CONVERT TO RELATIVE 

BLOCK 
IGG019KI READ/WRITE by BLOCK KEY 



1592 

256 
272 
696 
168 
216 

192 



Appendix B 159 



IGG019KJ Foundation Module for 

Spanned Records 
IGG019KK READ/WRITE BY BLOCK ID 
IGG019KL Dynamic Buffering for 

Spanned Records 
IGG019KM WRITE ADD FORMAT U or V 
IGG019KN WRITE ADD for Spanned 

Records 
IGG019KO WRITE ADD FORMATE F 
IGG019KQ WRITE verification 
IGG019KR READ/WRITE for Spanned 

Records 
IGG019KD CHANNEL END APPENDAGE 
IGG019KW KEY EXTENDED SEARCH 
IGG019KY SELF FORMAT EXTENDED 

SEARCH 
IGG019LA PRE-FORMAT EXTENDED 

SEARCH 
IGG019LC END OF EXTENT APPENDAGE 
IGG019LE DYNAMIC BUFFERING 
IGG019LG READ EXCLUSIVE 
IGG019LI CHECK MODULE 



3640 

336 
336 

720 

moo 

312 
352 
768 

360 
352 
176 

216 

152 
304 
888 
224 



TOTAL BDAM. 



Modules Common to BSAM and QSAM 



IECQBFG1 
IGC0106H 
IGC0806H 
IGC0906H 
IFGAAABA-SL 

IGG019AH 

IGG019AV-SL 
IGG019AX 

IGG019B0 

IGG019C0-SL 
IGG019C1 

IGG019C2 
IGG019C3 

IGG019C4-SL 

IGG019CA 
IGG019CB 
IGG019CC-SL 

IGG019CD-SL 
IGG019CE 
| IGG019CF 

IGG019C:G 
IGG019CH-SL 

IGG019CI-SL 

| IGG019CJ-SL 

IGG019CL 
IGG019CM 

IGG019CN 



GETPOOL routine 
SYNADAF 
SYNADAF 
SYNADAF 
SYSIN/SYSOUT ACB 

interface 
SYSIN/SYSOUT error 

routine 
Dummy Data Set Return 
User Totaling Save 

Routine 
BUILDRCD buffer pool 

aguisition 
CE Appendage - U Format 
ASYNCH Error return TRACK 

Overflow 
EOB Track Overflow 
XCE Track Overflow/PCI 

QSAM Appendage 
EOB Appendage - Search 

Direct 
CNTRL Card Reader 
CNTRL Printer 
EOB PT/HT/Update/DA-IN/ 

TO-IN 
EOB DA 

EOB Printer-Punch 
EOB Printer-Punch ASA 

character 
SIO Appendage - Update 
EOE Appendage - DA- Input 

Non-Fixed 
CE Appendage - 

Input/RDBACK Fixed 
CE Appendage - INPUT Var 

Length 
SIO Appendage - Printer 
Paper Tape Code 

Conversion TELETYPE 
Paper Tape Code 

Conversion ASCII 



224 
563 
43 6 
733 
52 8 

1168 

168 
120 

128 

248 
360 

1048 
344 

280 

176 
168 
776 

672 
416 
624 

496 
128 

560 

592 

64 
768 

512 



160 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



IGG019CO 

IGG019CP 
| IGG019CQ 

IGG019CR 

IGG019CS 

IGG019CT 
| IGG019CU 

IGG019CV 

IGG019CW 

IGG019CX 

IIGG019CY 
IGG019CZ 
IGG019EI 

IGG019EJ 

IGG019EK-SL 
IGG019FN-SL 

IGG019FP-SL 

IGG019HT-SL 
IGG019TC 

IGG019TD 

IGG019TV 

IGG019TW 

IGG019T2 



Paper Tape Code Convers. 

BURROUGHS 
Paper Tape Code 

Conversion FRIDEN 
Paper Tape Code Conver. 

IBM PTTC/8 
Paper Tape Code 

Conversion NCR 
CE Appendage Paper Tape 

Reader Fixed 
EOB routine (INOUT/OUTIN 

override) 
CE/XCE/PCI Appendage - 

Chained Sch 
EOB DA Output Chained 

Sch 
EOB Tape In/Out DA 

Input Chained Sch 
EOB Printer/Punch Sch 
EOB ASA Printer/Punch 

Chained Sch 
EOB Appendage Chained Sch 
XCE append bypass chkpnt 

F or U 
XCE append bypass chkpnt 

V 

SIO Appendage - Search 

Direct 
CE Appendage - search 

Direct 
Page fix appendage AOS 
EOB Routine - User 

Totaling Tape 
EOB Routine - User 

Totaling DA 
EOB Return DA Output 

PCI - User Total 
EOB Rtn - Tape In/Out 

PCI User Total 
EOB Rtn - TRK OV - User 

Totaling 



512 

768 

768 

768 

24 

48 

1760 

976 

624 

184 
408 

208 
416 

424 

520 
304 

440 

184 
472 

632 
1000 

410 
1056 



IECBBFB1 BUILD buffer pool 
acguisition 



88 



TOTAL BSAM/QSAM common.. 



BSAM/QSAM Modules (3505/3525) 



IGG0197L 
IGG0197M 
IGG0197N 
IGG0197P 
IGG0197Q 
IGG0201R 
IGG0201P 
IGG019FK 
IGG019FQ 
IGG019FU 
IGG019FA 
IGG019C6 



BSAM Modules 



Open Stage I 

Open Stage I 

Open Stage II 

Open Stage II 

Open Stage II 

CLOSE 

CLOSE 

EOB - Punch with DPI 

EOB - 3525 Print 

EOB - 3525 Interpret 

CNTRL - 3525 Printer Control 

Appendage-3525 Associated Data Set 

TOTAL BSAM/QSAM 3505/3525 



102 4 


1024 


1024 


1024 


1024 


1024 


1024 


350 


900 


250 


350 


ta Set 186 



Appendix B 161 



IIGC0t)02D 
IGC0002E 
IGC0010E 
IGG019BA-SL 
| IGG019BB-SL 
IGG019BC-SL 
IGG019BD-SL 

IIGG019BE-SL 
IGG019BF 
IGG019BG 
| IGG019BH 
IGG019BI 
| IGG019BK 

IGG019BL 

IGG019BM 
IGG019BR 
IGG019BS 
IGG019BT 
IGG019BU 
IGG019BV 
IGG019DA 
IGG019DB 

IGG019DC 
IGG019DD 



Device Type SVC Routine 424 

SVC 25 Track Balance Rotuine 845 

SVC 105 - Access SYS1.IMAGLIB 1090 

READ/WRITE all Devices 448 

CHECK all devices 528 

NOTE/POINT disk 328 

NOTE/POINT tape 368 

CNTRL tape 512 

READ Paper Translate 576 

CHECK paper Tape 240 

READ/WRITE Update 408 

CHECK Update 112 

NOTE/POINT return DA 448 

PCI/T.C. /Update 

NOTE/POINT return tape 272 

PCI 

EOE Appendage Update 144 

WRITE Create BDAM/VRE 1960 

CHECK Create BDAM/VRE 360 

CE Appendage Create BDAM 184 

Offset READ 152 

CE Appendage Offset READ 328 

WRITE Create BDAM/Fixed 792 

WRITE Create BDAM/Non- 864 

Fixed 

CHECK Create BDAM 200 

WRITE Create BDAM/Track 1288 

Overflow 



TOTAL BSAM modules. 



162 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



QSAM Modules (Simple Buffering) 



IGG019AA-SL 

IGG019AB-SL 

IGG019AC-SL 
IGG019AD-SL 

| IGG019AE 
IGG019AF 

IGG019AG-SL 

IGG019AI-SL 

IGG019AJ-SL 

IGG019AK-SL 

| IGG019AL-SL 

IGG019AM-SL 

IGG019AN-SL 

IGG019AQ-SL 

| IGG019AE-SL 
IGG019AT 

| IGG019AW 
IGG019BN 

IGG019BO 

IGG019BP 

IGG019BQ 

IGG019FB 

IGG019FD 

IGG019FF 

IGG019FG 

IGG019FJ 

IGG019FL 



GET Locate Fixed/ 

Undefined 
GET Locate Variable/ 

D-format 
GET Move Fixed/Undefined 
GET Move Variable/ 

D-Format 
GET Dpdate/PUTX 
Synchronizing RTN Get 

Update 
GET Move Fixed/Undefined 

with CNTRL 
PUT Locate Fixed/ 

Undefined 
PUT Locate Variable 
PUT Move Fixed/Undefined 
PUT Move Variable/D- 

Format 
GET Locate Fixed/ 

Undefined HDBACK 
GET Move Fixed/Undefined 

RDBACK 
Synchronizing RTN GET 

Input/RDBACK 
Synchronizing RTN PUT 
GET Paper Tape Character 

Conversion 
EOE Appendage Update 
GET Update Locate VAR 

LEN EXTEN 
GET/Locate Var Length 

Return extension 
PUT/Locate Var Length 

Return extension 
GET Update Variable 

Spanned 
GET Locate Variable 

Spanned 
GET Move Variable 

Spanned 
GET Data Variable 

Spanned 
PUT Data Variable 

Spanned 
PUT Locate Variable 

Spanned 
PUT Move Variable 

Spanned 



TOTAL QSAM (simple buffering).. 

QSAM Modules (Exchange Buffering) 

IGG019EA GET Locate Fixed 
IGG019EB GET Locate F/V/U 

Unblocked 
IGG019EC GET Substitute 

Fixed/Undef Unblocked 
IGG019ED GET Substitute Fixed 

Blocked 
IGG019EE PUT/PUTX Unblocked 
IGG019EF PUT/PUTX Blocked 

TOTAL QSAM (exchange buffering) 



160 

168 

3 84 
264 

528 
584 

144 

128 

272 
224 
328 

160 

280 

424 

264 
752 

256 
1952 

608 

976 

848 

232 

448 

464 

576 

320 

560 



144 
104 

88 

184 

336 
288 



Appendix B 163 



BSAM/QSAM Extended Recovery for 3211 



IGG019FR 
IGG019FS 
IGG019FT 



Appendage 
Error Retry 



184 
976 
240 



TOTAL BSAM/QSAM. 3211, 



BSAM 1419/1275 Modules 

IGG019C6 Appendages -3525 associated data 

IGG019FA CNTRL - 3525 printer control 

IGG019FK EOB punch with DPI 

IGG019FQ EOB - 3525 print 

IGG019FO EOB - 3525 interpret 

IGG019V1 READ 

IGG019V2 EOB 

IGG019V3 CHECK 

IGG019V4 CNTRL 

IGG019V5 Appendages 

IGG0197C OPEN Stage II 

IGG0197D OPEN Stage III 

IGG0197L OPEN stage 1 

IGG0197H OPEN stage 1 

IGG0197N OPEN stage 2 

IGG0197P OPEN stage 2 

IGG0197Q OPEN stage 2 

IGG0201D CLOSE Module 

IGG0201P CLOSE 

IGG0201R CLOSE 

TOTAL BIS AM 1419/12 75 

INDEXED SEQUENTIAL ACCESS METHOD MODULES 

BISAM Modules 



set 186 

350 

350 

900 

250 

176 

336 

416 

440 

3864 

1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 

1024 



IGG019G0 


Comb, WRITE 
FS 


KN 


Appenda 


ge 


2392 


IGG019G1 


Comb, WRITE 
FSWC 


KN 


Appenda 


ge 


2408 


IGG019G2 


Comb, WRITE 
FU 


KN 


Appenda 


ge 


2168 


IGG019G3 


Comb, WRITE 


KN 


Appendage 


2480 




FOWC 










IGG019G4 


Comb, WRITE 


KN 


Appendage 


2904 




BS 










IGG019G5 


Comb, WRITE 
BSWC 


KN 


Appenda 


ge 


3000 


IGG019G6 


Comb, WRITE 
BH 


KN 


Appenda 


ge 


3344 


IGG019G7 


Comb, WRITE 
BUWC 


KN 


Appenda 


ge 


3872 


IGG019G8 


Comb, READ, 


WRITE K 




1376 




Appendage (NO WC) 






IGG019G9 


Comb, READ, 


WRITE K 




1552 




Appendage (WC) 






IGG019GL 


WKN, NO, WC 








2456 


IGG019GM 


WKN, WC 








2672 


IGG019GN 


COMB, NO, WC 






3 752 


IGG019GO 


COMB, WC 








4056 


IGG019GV 


WRITE KN Asynchronous 




2352 




(WC) 










IGG019GW 


Combined Asynchronous 




3 53 6 




(WC) 










IGG019GX 


READ, WRITE 


K 






1144 




Asynchronous 






IGG019GY 


WRITE KN Asynchronous 




2344 



164 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 





(NO WC) 




IGG019GZ 


Combined Asynchronous 
(NO WC) 


3320 


IGG019I9 


Function/Operation Routines 
for BISAM 


1572 


IGG019H3 


Combined PMT (VLR) 


2064 


IGG019H7 


READ, WRITE K PMT (VLR) 


1408 


IGG019HP 


Channel Program WRITE 
KN (VLR) 


1272 


IGG019IM 


WRITE KN Appendage (VLR) 


2264 


IGG019IN 


WRITE KN Appendage 
(VLR) 


3752 


IGG019IO 


Comb, WRITE KN 

Appendage (VLR) 


3 754 


IGG019IX 


READ, WRITE K 

Asynchronous (VLR) 


1192 


IGG019IY 


WRITE KN Asynchronous 
(VLR) 


3480 


IGG019IZ 


Combined Asynchronous 
(VLR) 


4320 


IGG019I9 


READ, WRITE K Appendage 
(VLR) 


1576 


IGG019J0 


Combined PMT NLSD=0 


1696 


IGG019J3 


Combined PMT NLSD#0 


1976 


IGG019J6 


READ, WRITE K PMT NLSD=0 


1248 


IGG019J7 


READ, WRITE K PMT NLSD#0 


1424 


IGG019JC 


CHECK 


136 


IGG019JG 


Page Fix Appendage 


808 


IGG019JH 


SIO Appendage for BPS 
Devices 


3568 


IGG019JI 


Dynamic Buffer 


712 


IGG019JJ 


Channel Program NLSD=2+ 


192 


IGG019JK 


Channel Program NLSD=1 


88 


IGG019JL 


Channel Program READ, 
WRITE K (NO WC) 


408 


IGG019JM 


Channel Program READ, 
WRITE K (WC) 


536 


IGG019JN 


Channel Program WRITE KN 
FS 


928 


IGG019JO 


Channel Program WRITE KN 
BS 


856 


IGG019JP 


Channel Program WRITE KN 
FSWC 


1248 


IGG019JQ 


Channel Program WRITE KN 
BSWC 


1144 


IGG019JR 


Channel Program WRITE KN 
FO 


888 


IGG019JS 


Channel Program WRITE KN 
BU 


904 


IGG019JT 


Channel Program WRITE KN 
FDWC 


1208 


IGG019JU 


Channel Program WRITE KN 
BDWC 


1224 


IGG019J7 


READ, WRITE K NPMT 


328 


IGG019JW 


WRITE KN NPMT 


200 


IGG019JX 


WRITE KN PMT 


656 


IGG019P7 


Page Fix for IEHDASDR 


68 



QISAM Modules (Load Mode) 



IGG019GA POT (NO WC) 

IGG019GB POT (WQ 

IGG019GC PUT Appendage (NO WC) 

IGG019GD POT Appendage (WC) 

IGG019GE Channel Programs (NO WC) 

IGG019GF Channel Programs (WC) 



4032 
4070 
1808 
2144 
616 
760 



Appendix B 165 



IGG019GG 

IGG019GH 
IGG019I1 

IGG019I2 

IGG019IA 
IGG019IB 
IGG019IE 

| IGG019IF 



SIO Appendage for BPS 

Devices 
Page Fix Appendage 
POT W/O WRITE Chk-Full 

Track Index Write 
POT W/O WRITE Chk-Full 

Track Index Write 
POT (NO WC VLR) 
POT (WC VLR) 
Channel Programs 

(NO WC VLR) 
Channel Programs (WC VLR) 



TOTAL QISAM Modules 



QISAM Modules (Scan Mode) 



IGG019HA 

IGG019HB 

IGG019HC 
IGG019HD 
IGG019HF 
| IGG019HG 

IGG019HH 

IGG019HI 

IGG019HJ 

| IGG019HK 

IGG019HL 
| IGG019HN 



SIO Appendage for BPS 

Devices 
GET POTX, RELSE, ESETL, 

SETL B 
Page Fix Appendage 
SETL K, SETL KC 
SETL I 
GET Appendage and 

Asynchronous 
POTX Appendage (NO WC) 
POTX Appendage (WC) 
SETL I Appendage 
SETL K, SETL KC 

APPENDAGE 
Channel Programs 
GET, POTX, RELSE, 

ESETL, SETL B (VLR) 



TOTAL QISAM Modules, 



TELECOHMONICATIONS MODOLES 



BTAM Modules 

IGG019LP 
IGG019M0 

IGG019M1 



IGG019M2 
IGG019M3 

IGG019M4 

IGG019M5 

IGG019MA 
IGG019MB 
IGG019MC 
IGG019MD 



Start I/O Page Fix Routine 
IBM 2740 Communication 

Terminal with checking 
IBM 2740 Communication 

Terminal with station 

control, checking, and 

Auto poll 
IBM 2740 Communication 

Terminal with station 

control and Auto Poll 
IBM 2260 Display Onit 

(attached as a remote 

terminal with a 2701 

Adapter Onit) 
IBM 1060 Data 

Communication System 

with Auto Poll 
IBM BSC Terminal on a 

nonswitched point-to- 
point network 
Read/Write Channel 

Program Generator 
Channel End/Abnormal End 

Appendage 
Program Controlled 

Interrupt Appendage 
IBM 1050 Data 



1336 

256 
4040 

4080 

4312 

4384 

616 

760 



1072 
3 792 

192 

1400 
616 
832 

344 

856 

64 

720 

632 
3904 



1032 
268 

214 
150 

292 

200 

282 
3354 

5284 

1234 

238 



166 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Communication System 
nonswitched network 
IGG019HE IBM 1050 Data 204 

Communication System on 

a nonswitched network 

with Auto Poll 
IGG019MF IBH 1050 Data 312 

Communication System 

on a switched network 
IGG019HI IBM 1060 Data 192 

Communication System 
IGG019MJ IBM 1030 Data Collection 224 

System 
IGG019MK IBM 1030 Data Collection 224 

System with Auto Poll 
IGG019ML AT&T 83B3 Selective 146 

Calling Stations 
IGG019MN Western Onion Plan 115A 

Outstations 138 

IGG019MP AT&T Model 33/35 

Teletypewriter Exchange 

Terminal on a switched 

network (using eight 

bit Data Interchange 

Code) 170 

IGG019MR Online Test Control 

Module 2882 

IGG019MS Request/Release Buffer 

Routine 288 

IGG019MT IBM 2740 Communication 

Terminal 146 

IGG019MO IBM 2740 Communication 

Terminal on a switched 

network 172 

IGG019MV IBM 2740 Communication 

Terminal with transmit 

control and checking on 

a switched network 270 

IGG019MW IBM 2740 Communication 

Terminal with transmit 

control on a switched 

network 186 

IGG019MX IBM 2740 Communication 

Terminal with checking 

on a switched network 270 

IGG019MY IBM 2740 Communication 

Terminal with station 

control and checking 216 

IGG019MZ IBM 2740 Communication 

Terminal with station 

control 152 

IGG019PA Channel End/Abnormal 

End Appendage 455 

IGG019PB World Trade Telegraph 

Terminals 158 

IGG019PC IBM BSC Terminal on a 

nonswitched multipoint 

network 314 

IGG019PD WTTA Channel End 1008 

Appendage 
IGG019PE IBM 2741 Communications 

Terminal 106 

IGG019PF IBM 2741 Communications 

Terminal on a switched 

network 138 

IGG019PG Second-Level Attention Routine 

(for Local 3270) 160 

IGG019PH Local 3270 I/O Module 135 



Appendix B 167 



I IGG019PI 
IGG019PK 
IGG019PL 



IGG419M6 



Local Online Test Control 

2741 Break routine 

IBM 2740 Communications 
Terminal with checking 
and 010 (IBM 2760 
Optical Image Unit) 

IBM BSC Terminal on a 
switched network 



480 
62 



262 
424 



TOTAL BTAM, 



GRAPHIC PROGRAMMING SERVICES MODULES 



Graphics Access Method (GAM) 



IFFANA 

IFFCAN01 

IFFCAN02 

IFFCAN03 

IFFPAAST 

IGG019OA 

IGG019OB 
IGG019OC 
IGG019OE 

IGG019OJ 
IGG019OK 



Graphic attention analysis 
Termination option display 
Buffer dump formatting 
CANCEL key linkage 
Store graphic orders 
Graphic I/O control 

(GIOCR) 
Graphic CE-XCE appendage 
Graphic page fix appendage 
Graphic attention routing 

(GAR) 
Graphic entry interface 
Attention inguiry 



TOTAL GAM, 



Graphics Problem Oriented Routines (PORs) 

IFFPBAPR Alphameric character display 
IFFPCAAR Circular arc generation 
IFFPDAPL Data plotting 
IFFPEAGR Rectangular cartesian grid 

generation 
IFFPFAVA Circular arc generation with 

vectors 
IFFPGAVP Data plotting with vectors 
IFFPHALA Grid label 
IFFPIAPG Polar grid generation 
IFFPJAPV Polar grid generation with 

vectors 
IFFPKADG Data plotting 
IFFPLARE Light pen tracking 
IFFPPASG Offscreen/Offgrid 

TOTAL Graphics (PORs)... 

GRAPHIC SOBRODTINE PACKAGE MODULES 



704 

2504 

2640 

44 

416 
2952 

368 

52 

2120 

192 
1232 



1216 
2512 
3504 
1432 

3024 

2944 
1848 
4224 
3704 

4264 

1048 

816 



IFFAAA02 


TMGSP 


routine 


IFFAAA03 


INDEV 


routine 


IFFAAA04 


TMDEV 


routine 


IFFAAA05 


INGDS 


routine 


IFFAAA06 


TMGDS 


routine 


IFFACA00 


CRATL 


routine 


IFFACA01 


ENATL 


routine 


IFFACA02 


ENATN 


routine 


IFFACA03 


DSATN 


routine 


IFFACA04 


MPATL 


routine 


IFFACA05 


MLPEO 


routine 


IFFACA06 


SLPAT 


routine 


IFFAC&07 


MLITS 


routine 


IFFACA08 


RQATN 


routine 


IFFACA13 


SALRM 


routine 



208 

1552 
456 

1080 
488 
800 
784 
92 
696 

1176 
560 
304 
872 

3080 
176 



168 0S/VS1 Storage Estimates 



IFFACA50 SPEC routine 

IFFADA01 GSPRD routine 

IFFADA02 RCURS routine 

IFFADA03 ICURS routine 

IFFAEA01 SDATM routine 

IFFAEA02 SGRAM routine 

IFFAEA03 SDATL routine 

IFFAEA04 SGDSL routine 

IFFAEA06 SSCIS routine 

IFFAEA07 SCHAM routine 

IFFAFA01 PLINE routine 

IFFAFA02 PSGMT routine 

IFFAFA03 PTEXT routine 

IFFAFA04 STPOS routine 

IFFAFA05 BGSEQ routine 

IFFAFA06 ENSEQ routine 

IFFAFA07 ENSUB routine 

IFFAFA08 LKSUB routine 

IFFAFA09 INCL routine 

(IFFAFA10 Alias for IFFAFA09) 

IFFAFA11 EXEC routine 

IFFAFA12 RESET routine 

IFFAFA13 IDPOS routine 

IFFAFA14 FSMOD routine 

IFFAFA15 STEOS routine 

(IFFAFA16 Alias for IFFAFA01) 

(IFFAFA17 Alias for IFFAFA04) 

(IFFAFA18 Alias for IFFAFA05) 

IFFAFA19 ORGDS routine 

IFFAGA01 LOCPN routine 

IFFAGA02 BGTRK routine 

IFFAGA03 RDTRK routine 

IFFAGA04 ENTRK routine 

IFFAGA05 DFSTR routine 

IFFAGA06 PLSTR routine 

IFFAGA07 ORGEN routine 

IFFAGA08 CNVRT routine 

IFFAHA01 Flow control routine 

IFFAHA02 Buffer routine 

IFFAHA03 Key table routine 

IFFAHA04 Data generator routine 

IFFAHA05 Data store routine 

IFFAHA06 Scaling routine 

IFFAHA07 Scissoring routine 

IFFAHA11 Director 

IFFAHA12 Status table 

IFFAHA13 Update routine 

(IFFAHA14 Alias for IFFAHA13) 

(IFFAHA15 Alias for IFFAHA06) 

IFFAHA16 Stroke table 

IFFAJA01 ITRC routine 

IFFAJA02 ITBP routine 

(IFFAJA03 Alias for IFFAJA02) 

IFFAJA04 ITST routine 

IHCGSP01 INGSP routine (FORTRAN) 

IHCGSP02 TMGSP routine (FORTRAN) 

IHCGSP03 Director (FORTRAN) 

IHCGSP04 BCNV routine 

IHDGSP01 INGSP routine (COBOL) 

(IHDGSP02 COBOL alias for IHCGSP02) 

IHDGSP03 Director (COBOL) 

(IHEGSP01 PL/I alias for IHCGSP01) 

(IHEGSP02 PL/I alias for IHCGSP02) 

IHEGSP03 Director (PL/I) 



504 

1852 

832 

1084 

720 

184 

224 

1008 

176 

160 

2072 

2728 

2504 

1576 

704 

336 

656 

1056 

84 8 

848 

1672 

560 

112 

1176 



720 

904 

968 

400 

200 

592 

2904 

2712 

92 

1520 

1224 

528 

1424 

2464 

608 

1672 

280 

1461 

1120 



3048 
320 
552 

328 
162 
238 
348 
704 
154 

348 



428 



TOTAL GRAPHICS SUBROUTINES. 



Appendix B 169 



JAM Access Method Modules 



IGG0196U Open Executor 
IGG0196V Open Executor 
IGG0196W Open Executor 
IGG0196X Open Executor 
IGG0196Y Open Executor 
IGG0196Z Open Executor 
IGG019DF Unit Record Get Module 
IGG019DG Unit Record Put Module 
IGG019DH DA 5 Tape Get/Put 

Module 
IGG019DJ-SL JES Compatability 

Interface 
IGG019DK-SL JES Compatability 

Interface 
IGG019DL Channel End Appendage 
IGG019DM Asynchronous Get Routine 
IGG019FM DA & Tape DCB Exit Model 
IGG0201M Close Executor 
IECURATI Attention Routine for 

JEPS Reader 



1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1024 
1218 
1812 
1088 

1264 

1968 

52 

184 

328 

1024 

16 



TOTAL JAM Modules. 



170 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



TCAM Access 
IGG01925 



IGG019R0 

IGG019R1 
IGG019R2 
IGG019R3 
IGG019R4 
IGG019R5 

IGG019R6 
IGG019R7 

IGG019R8 

IGG019R9 

IGG019RA 
| IGG019RB 

IGG019RC 
IGG019RD 

IGG019RG 
IGG019RH 

IGG019RI 
IGG019RJ 
IGG019RL 
IGG010RH 
IGG019RN 
IGG019RO 
IGG019RP 

IGG019RQ 
IGG019RR 
IGG019RS 

IGG019RT 

IGG019RD 

IGG019RW 

IGG019Q0 
IGG019Q1 
IGG019Q2 

IGG019Q3 

IGG019Q4 
IGG019Q5 

IGG019Q6 

IGG019Q7 
IGG019Q8 

IGG019Q9 
IGG019QE 



Method Modules 

Line end appendage 6 100 

for QTAM Compatable 

system 
Line Appendage for all 9560 

type lines 
Dial Line Scheduler 1184 

Disk Appendage 640 

Leased Line Scheduler 736 

Send Scheduler 1240 

Attention Handler for 350 

2260 Local 
Start/up Message Routine 982 

EBCDIC Special Characters 108 

Table 
ASCI Special Characters 120 

Table 
6BIT Special Characters 120 

Table 
Checkpoint Appendage 96 

Dispatcher without 512 

subtask trace 
Disk Message Queues Routine 1330 
Buffered Terminal 2148 

Scheduler 
GET/READ Routine 3 088 

QTAM Compatible 2340 

GET Routine 
POT/WRITE Routine 1184 

QTAM Compatible POT Routine 552 
CHECK Routine 360 

POINT Routine 328 

PCI Appendage 1088 

Dispatcher with subtask trace 632 
Disk Reusability/Copy 4350 

Routine 
Post Pending Routine 140 

Special Characters Table 96 

Special Characters Table 80 

for 2260 remote 
Special Characters Table 80 

for 83B3, 115A 
Special Characters Table 80 

for IWX 
Special Characters Table 96 

for World Trade 
I/O Interrupt Trace Routine 630 
2260 Local Scheduler 400 

Line Appendage for 8056 

binary-synchronous devices 
Line Appendage for 5776 

start/stop devices 
Line Appendage for 1050 3776 

Line Appendage for a 4 92 

QTAM Compatible System 
Send Scheduler for Leased Lines 768 

and No TSO 
Send Scheduler with No TSO 1040 

Checkpoint Continuation Restart 398 

Subroutine 
Concentrator Send Scheduler 1367 
START I/O Appendage 5 00 



TOTAL TCAM Modules, 



Appendix B 171 



TCAM Optional modules from SYS1.LINKLIB 



IEDQCO 
IEDQC1 
IEDQC2 
IEDQC3 
IEDQCF 
IEDQCG 
IEDQCH 
IEDQCI 
IEDQCJ 
IEDQCK 
IEDQCL 
IEDQCM 
IEDQCN 
IEDQCO 



IEDQCP 
IEDQCQ 
IEDQCS 
IEDQCQ 
IEDQCV 

IEDQCH 
IEDQCX 
| IEDQCZ 
IEDQEC 
IEDQEW 
IEDQEZ 
IEDQNG 
IEDQNH 
IEDQNJ 
IEDQNK 
IEDQNM 
IEDQNO 
IEDQNP 
IEDQNQ 
IEDQNR 
IEDQNS 
IEDQNX 



SYSCLOSE command 

POLLDLAY command 

OLT command 

STATDISP command 

DATOPFLD or OPTFIELD command 

RLNSTATN command 

STSTATUS command 

LNSTATUS command 

QSTATUS command 

INTRCEPT command 

ACTVATED command 

DPRIOPCL or DSFCOPCL command 

CPRIOPCL 

ACCEPTNG, NOACCEPT, HOENTRNG r 

NOTRAFIC, or 

ENTERING command 
GOTRACE or NOTRACE command 
SOSPXMIT command 
ACCEPTNG or ENTERING command 
YESXMIT command 
SYSINTVL, SYSCLOSE, or NOXMIT 

command 
AUTOSTOP or AUTOSTART command 
ERRECORD command 
INTERVAL or POLLDLAY command 
POT Scheduler 
GET Scheduler 
GET Scheduler 
Checkpoint (CHECKPT macro) 
Checkpoint (TCHNG macro) 
Checkpoint (Operator Control) 
Checkpoint (Environment) 
Checkpoint (CKRPQ macro) 
Checkpoint 
Checkpoint 
Checkpoint 
Checkpoint 
Checkpoint 
Operator Awareness Message 

Router 



1230 

1270 

540 

690 

1970 

500 

970 

1150 

1 190 

1000 

1500 

1070 

550 



1650 
900 
1320 
1000 
1780 
1610 

1020 

1000 

1190 

172 

2680 

30 

290 

260 

250 

880 

470 

250 

790 

830 

272 

208 

640 



TOTAL TCAM (SYS1 . LINKLIB) . . 



172 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



Index 



Indexes to OS/VS publications are 
consolidated in the OS/VS Master Index, 
GC28-0602. This master index references 
other publications that contain additional 
information about the subjects listed here. 



ABDUMP - SVC 51 module sizes 136 
ABEND - SVC 13 (DAE) module sizes 136 
ABEND - SVC 13 module sizes 136 
access methods 

BDAH 86-89 

BISAH 53-57 

BPAM 90 

BSAM,QSAM 70-85 

BTAH 64-69 

module sizes 159-172 

QISAM 60-63 

storage 53 

TCAM 91-108 
alternate console option 38 
alternate path retry (APR) description 12 
analyze/format, workarea for IEHDASDB 29 
APE (see recovery management) 
ASCII - SVC 67 module sizes 136 
assembler XF work space reguirements 133 
atlas - SVC 86 module sizes 144 
auxiliary storage 

definition of 11 

devices for VS/1 111,112 

minimum device reguirement 11 



BPAM 

(basic partitioned access method) 90 
BSAM/QSAM external recovery for 3211 module 

sizes 164 
BSAM/QSAM module sizes 160,161 

BSAM 

(basic seguential access method) 

70-85 
example 85 

1421,22/1275 module sizes 164 
BTAM 

(basic telecommunication access 

method) 64-69 
channel program space per device type 

69 
code translation table storage 

reguirement 69 
coding space estimate 64 
control block space by device type per 

line 65,66 
control block space for each line 67 
control block space for line group 

66 
example of storage estimate 69 
module sizes 166-168 
SVC 66 module sizes 138 
buffer (s) 

job entry subsystem (JES) reguirement 

15 
optimum job entry subsystem (JES) size 

15 
storage reguirement for BISAM 53 
storage reguirement for QISAM 60 
workarea reguirement for IEHDASDR 35 



basic direct access method (BDAM) 86-89 
basic indexed seguential access method 

(BISAM) 53 
basic partitioned access method (BPAM) 90 
basic secruential access method (BSAM) 

70-85 
basic telecommunications access method 

(ETAM) 64-69 
BDAM 

(basic direct access method 86-89 
example 89 
module sizes 159,160 
BISAM 

(basic indexed seguential access 

method) 53 
buffer area estimate 53 
channel program space with WRITE KN 

56 
channel program space without WEITE KN 

54 
coding space estimate with WRITE KN 

55 
coding space estimate without WRITE KN 

54 
control block estimate 56 
example of storage estimate 57 



catalog managment module sizes 141 
CCH (see recovery management) 
channel check handler, description 12 
channel program space for 

BISAM 54,56 

QISAM data set creation 63 

QISAM data set scanning 63 
channels, multiplexor and selector storage 

39 
checkpoint data set for TCAM 132 
checkpoint /rest art 

data set 130 

work area reguirement 109 

SVC -63 module sizes 143 
close 

executor module sizes 142 

TCAM module sizes 142 
coding space for 

BISAM 55 

BTAM 64 

QISAM data set scanning and creation 
62 
command processor - SVC 109 module sizes 

137 
composite console option 38 



Index 173 



console devices for multiple console 

support 38 
control block space for 

BISAM 56 

QISAM data set creation and scanning 
63 
control program 

auxiliary storage requirement 111, 
112 

options 38 

pageable 15 

pageable virtual requirement 19 r 20 

storage requirement 38 
conversational remote job entry 50-52 
core image dump data set (SYS1.DUMP) 129 
CRJE region size estimation 50-52 



DADSM module sizes 139-141 

DASD minimum devices requirement for 

auxiliary storage 11 
DASDR - SVC 82 module sizes 144 
data access methods (see access methods) 
data management 

options 38 

requirements (see access methods) 
data set creation for QISAM 62,63 
data set for checkpoint/restart 130 
data set scanning for QISAM data set 

creation 62 
data set utilities, storage requirement 

31-34 
DDR (see recovery management) 
direct access method (see access methods) 
direct access storage requirement 40 
disk storage devices used as auxiliary 

storage 110 
display unit status module sizes 139,140 
dump area for pageable supervisor 13,14 
dump, workarea for IEHDASDR 29 
dynamic device reconfiguration (DDR) 12 



entry table for overlay supervisor 23 
error recovery module sizes 155-158 
error routines 

DASDR module sizes 157 

direct access volume verification 
module sizes 157 

graphic module sizes 156 

module sizes for common routines 155 
156 

page file module sizes 157 

TCAM module sizes 156 

1287/1288 module sizes 157 

2955 module sizes 157 

3211 module sizes 157 
error statistics by volume storage 
requirement 38 



example 

BDAM 89 

BPAM 90 

BSAM 85 

BISAM storage estimate 57 

fixed real storage 44-46 

fixed system queue area (SQA) 48 

graphic access method 59 

pageable control program 20,21 

QSAM 85 

QISAM 63 

TCAM 105-108 



fixed real storage 

description 36 

RTAM 41 
fixed storage requirement, for processing 

programs 49 
fixed RTAM storage 42 



graphic access method (GAM) 58,59 

graphics module sizes 143 

graphics problem oriented module sizes 

168,169 
graphics storage requirement 38,40 
graphics subroutine package module sizes 

168,169 



IEBCOMPR storage estimation 31 
IEBCOPY storage estimation 31 
IEHATLAS - SVC 86 module sizes 144 
IEHATLAS storage estimation 29 
IEHDASDR buffer workarea requirement 35 
IEHDASDR storage estimation 29 
IEHINITT storage estimation 30 
IEHIOSUP storage estimation 30 
IEHLIST storage estimation 30 
IEHMOVE storage estimation 30 
IEHPROGM storage estimation 30 
IEHSTATR storage estimation 30 
image library (SYS1 .IMAGELIB) 128 
indexed sequential access methods (see 

access methods) 
input/output supervisor 

channel dependent devices 39 

devices 40 

storage requirement 37-41 
introduction 11 



JAM module sizes 170 

job entry subsystem 14 

buffer requirement 15 

JES request module sizes 144 

job queue data set (SYS1 .SYSJOBQE) 121 



link library (SYS1.LINKLIB) 119 
loader, storage estimation 24,27 
LOGREC data set (SYS1 .LOGREC) 11,117 



174 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



machine check handler (HCH) description 

11 
machine error recorder data set 

(SYS1.L0GREC) 117 
macro library (SYS1 .MACLIB) 128 
macros, control program 38 
magnetic tape storage requirement 40 
main storage requirement (see real storage) 
main storage, definition of 11 
message data set for RTAM 114 
MGCR - SVC 34 module sizes 137 
miscellaneous SVC module sizes 154 
module sizes 

access methods 159-172 

error recovery 155-158 

SVC Type3,4 134-158 
multiple console support storage 

requirement 38 
multiplexor channel storage requirement 
39 



nonpageable storaqe, definition and use 

13 
note list for overlay supervisor 23 
nucleus library (SYS 1. NUCLEUS) 115 
nucleus, storage requirement 42-44 



paqeable virtual storaqe 

contents 14 

requirement 14 
paqeable RTAM virtual storaqe 17 
paqing, definition of 11 
parameter library (SYS1.PARMLIB) 127 
partition 13 

access method 90 

requirements 21 

size in VS/1 21 
partitions 

number and size chanqes 13 

use 13 

where defined 13 
PCI fetch option storaqe requirement 38 
preface 5 

procedure library (SYS1. PROCLIB) 126 
program control interrupt (PCI) storaqe 

requirement 38 
protected queue area (PQA) 

fixed storage estimate 48 

requirement 21,22 
RTAM requirement 48 
PUTIPL, workarea for IEHDASDR 30 



online test executive proqram (OLTEP) 
storaqe requirement 49 

open executors 

BDAM module sizes 151 
BISAM module sizes 151 
BTAM module sizes 152 
graphics module sizes 152 
ISAM module sizes 149 
QISAM module sizes 152,153 
SAM module sizes 150,151 
TCAM module sizes 152,153 

OPEN/CLOSE/EOV module sizes 144-149 

operator communication - SVC 72 module 
sizes 138,139 

options for control program 38 

overlay supervisor 

description 23 
storage estimation 23 
tables and lists 23 



page data set ( SYS 1. PAGE) 118 

page, definition of 11 

pageable control program 19,20 

pageable job entry subsystem (JES) minimum 

fixed requirement 14 
pageable real storage 36 
pageable storage 14 

definition and use 13 

requirement for BISAM 54 
pageable supervisor 

areas 14 

functions 14 
pageable system queue area 14 



QISAH 

(queued indexed sequential access 

method) 60-63 
buffer area estimate 60 
channel proqram space for data set 

scanning and creation 63 
coding space for data set creation and 

scanning 62 
control block space for data set 

creation 63 
control block space for data set 

scanning 63 
data set creation 62,63 
example of storage estimate 63 
module sizes 165,166 

(queueed sequential access method) 

70-85 
example 85 
module sizes 163,164 
queued indexed sequential access method 

(see access methods) 
queueinq capacity for I/O supervisor 39 



QSAM 



real storaqe 

definition of 11 

durinq system generation 50 

estimation 36 

fixed requirement 36 

fixed TCAM requirement 104 

orqanization in VS/1 36 

requirement for protected queue area 

(PQA) 48 
restriction concerninq size 36 
RTAM 42 



Index 175 



recovery management 

APR (alternate path retry) , 
description 12 

CCH (channel ckeck handler) , 
description 12 

definition of storage 11 

DDE (dynamic device reconfiguration) , 
descrip tion 

MCH (machine check handler) , 
description 11 
region size estimation for CRJE 50-52 
remote job processing (CRJE) 50-52 
restart - SVC 52 module sizes 141-142 
restore, workarea for IEHDASDR 29 
restrictions 

job entry subsystem (JES) minimum 

fixed reguirement 14 

real storage size 36 
RTAM 

fixed reguirement 41 

fixed storage reguirement 42 

message data set 114 

pageable storage 17 

pageable virtual reguirement 17 

protected gueue area (PQA) reguirement 
48 

SYS1 .SYSJOBQE space reguirements 121 



sample library 117 
scheduler 

storage reguirement 38 
work area data set (SWADS) 125 
second console storage reguirement 38 
segment table for overlay supervisor 23 
selector channel storage reguirement 39 
seguential access methods (see access 

methods) 
service aids r storage reguirement 34 
SETPRT - SVC 81 module sizes 144 
SMF storage reguirement 38 
spool cylinder map size for SYS1.SYSP00L 
123,124 

spool data set (SYS1. SPOOL) 122-125 
STAE - SVC 60 module sizes 143 
standard list totals 

IEAIGG00 159 

IEARSV00 134 
storage reguirement for 

BISAM buffer area 53 

control program (CTRLPBOG) 38 

data management (DATAMGMT) 38 

graphics 38 

HMAPTFLE 34 

HMASPZAP 34 

HMBLIST 34 

HMDPRDMP 34 

HMDSADMP 34 

IEBCOPY 31 

IEBDG 32 

IEBEDIT 30 

IEBGENER 33 

IEBISAM 33 

IEBPTPCH 33 



storage requirement for BISAM (continued) 



IEBTCRIN 32 
TEBDPDTE 33 
IECOHPR 31 
IEHATLAS 29 
IEHDASDR 29 
IEHINITT 30 
IEHIOSUP 30 
IEHLIST 30 
IEHMOVE 30 
IEHPROGM 30 
IEHSTATR 30 
QISAM 60-63 
RTAM 17,41 

scheduler (SCHEDULR) 38 
SECONSOLE 38 
SVC table 38 
storage 

auxiliary, definition of 11 

data set utilities 31-34 

estimating virtual reguirements 15 

fixed RTAM reguirement 42 

nonpageable 13 

pageable 14 

pageable job entry subsystem (JES) 

reguirement 14,16 
pageable supervisor 14 
pageable virtual storage 19,20 
pageable RTAM 17 
pageable 2250 18 

protected gueue area (PQA) 21,22 
real, definition of 11 
recovery management, definition of 

11 

reguirement for input/output 

supervisor 37-41 
reguirement for loader 24,27 
reguirement for overlay supervisor 

26 
reguirement for protected gueue area 

(PQA) 4 8 
reguirement for supervisor services 

25-27 
resident nucleus reguirement 42-44 
total storage reguirement 11 
virtual reguirement for IBM-supplied 

utilities 29-34 
virtual reguirement for IBM-supplies 

programs 28 
virtual storage organization 13 
virtual, definition of 11 
subroutine library 129 
supervisor 

input/output 37-41 
loader storage reguirement 24,27 
nucleus 42 
options 38 
overlay 23 
pageable 14 

services, partition storage estimation 
for supervisor 25-27 
SVC library (SYS1. SVCLIB) 116 
SffADS (scheduler work area data set) 125 
SYSCTLG 113 

sysgen, real storage reguired for 50 
system catalog (SYSCTLG) 113 



176 OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 



system direct access devices 


subroutine library 


129 


SWADS 125 






SYSCTLG 113 






SYS1. 


. BRODCAST 


114, 


115 


SYS1, 


.DUMP 129 




SYS1. 


. IMAGELIB 


128 




SYS1. 


.LINKLIB 


119 




SYS1. 


.LOGEEC 


117 




SYS1. 


. MACLIB 


128 




SYS1. 


.MAN 129 


i 




SYS1. 


•NUCLEUS 


115 




SYS1. 


.PAGE 118 




SYS1, 


. PARMLIB 


127 




SYS1. 


.PROCLIB 


126 




SYS1, 


. SVCLIB 


116 




SYS1. 


, SYSJOBQE 


120 




SYS1. 


. SYSPOOL 


122-125 


SYS1. 


.TELECMLIB 


I 112 





system environmental recording (see 

recovery management) 
system generation, user options 14,15 
system initialization, real storage 

reguirement 50 
system log data set 117 
system management file (SMF) data set 

(SYS1.MAN) 129 
system gueue area (SQA) storage reguirement 

46,47 
system gueue area, pageable 14 
system residence libraries on auxiliary 

storage 11 
system utilities, storage reguirement 

29-34 



158 



SYS1. 


•DUMP 129 






SYS1. 


.IMAGELIB 


128 






SYS1. 


, LINKLIB 


119 






SYS1, 


.LOGREC 


117 






SYS1. 


.LOGREC - 


SVC 76 module 


sizes 


SYS1, 


.MACLIB 


128 






SYS1. 


.MAN 12S 


I 






SYS1, 


.NUCLEUS 


114 






SYS1. 


•PAGE 118 






SYS1. 


.PARMLIB 


127 






SYS1. 


.PROCLIB 


126 






SYS1. 


.SAMPLIB 


117 






SYS1. 


.SVCLIB 


116 






SYS1. 


.SYSJOBQE 


121,22 






SYS1, 


, SYSPOOL 


122 






SYS1. 


.SYSPOOL, 


cylinder 


map 


size 


SYS1, 


.TELECMLIB 112 







123,124 



SVS table storage reguirement 



38 



tables 

entry for overlay supervisor 23 
for overlay supervisor 23 
segment for overlay supervisor 23 
error recovery module sizes 157,158 



tape 
TCAM 



(telecommunication access method) 

91-108 
access method (TCAM) 91-108 
application program virtual storage 

size 102,103 
checkpoint data set 132 
example 105-108 



TCAM (continued) 



message control program size 91 
message gueue data set 131 
module sizes 171,172 
real storage reguirement 104 
storage reguirement 40 
SVC 104 module sizes 153 
TCLOSE - SVC 23 module sizes 143 
telecommunications access method (see 

access methods) 
type3-4 SVC routine module sizes 134-158 



unit record device error routine 
sizes 155 

unit record storage reguirement 

user options, how they alter vir 
storage 14,15 

utilities 

generalized trace storage e 

34 
HMAPTFLE storage estimation 
HMASPZAP storage estimation 
HMBLIST storage estimation 
HMDPRDMP storage estimation 
HMDSADMP storage estimation 
IEBCOMPR storage estimation 
IEBCOPY storage estimation 
IEBDG storage estimation 
IEBGENER storage estimation 
IEBISAM storage estimation 
IEBPTPCH storage estimation 
IEBTCRIN storage estimation 
IEBUPDTE storage estimation 
IEHATLAS storage estimation 
IEHDASDR storage estimation 
IEHINITT storage estimation 
IEHIOSUP storage estimation 
IEHLIST storage estimation 
IEHMOVE storage estimation 
IEHPROGM storage estimation 
IEHSTATR storage estimation 



module 

40 
tual 



stimation 

34 

34 
34 

34 

34 

31 
31 



32 



33 

33 
33 
32 
33 
29 
29 
30 
30 

30 

30 
30 
30 



V=R example 49 

V=R space, maximum 49 

virtual storage 

definition of 11 

estimating reguirement for TCAM 91 

estimating size 14 

estimating total reguirement 19,20 

graphic access method 58,59 

organization 13 

pageable RTAM 17,17 

pageable 2250 18 

reguirement for IBM-supplied programs 
28 
virtual=real, estimating storage 

reguirement 49 
volstat - SVC 91 module sizes 153 



2250, pageable storage 18 



Index 177 



OS/VS1 READER'S 

Storage Estimates COMMENT 

GC24-5094-1 FORM 



Your views about this publication may help improve its usefulness; this form will 
be sent to the author's department for appropriate action . Using this form to request 
system assistance or additional publications will delay response, however. For more 
direct handling of such requests, please contact your IBM representative or the 
IBM Branch Office serving your locality. 

Yes No 

• Does the publication meet your needs? □ □ 



Did you find the material: 






Easy to read and understand? 


□ 


□ 


Organized for convenient use? 


□ 


□ 


Complete? 


□ 


□ 


Well illustrated? 


□ 


□ 



Written for your technical level? □ □ 

What is your occupation? 



How do you use this publication: 

As an introduction to the subject? □ As an instructor in class? □ 

For advanced knowledge of the subject? □ As a student in class? □ 

To learn about operating procedures? □ As a reference manual? □ 



Your comments: 



// you would like a reply, please supply your name and address on the reverse 
side of this form . 

Thank you for your cooperation. No postage stamp necessary if mailed in the U.S.A. 
(Elsewhere, an IBM office or representative will be happy to forward your comments.) 



GC24-5094-1 



Your comments, please . . . 

This manual is part of a library that serves as a reference source for systems analysts, 
programmers, and operators of IBM systems. Your comments on the other side of this 
form will be carefully reviewed by the persons responsible for writing and publishing 
this material. All comments and suggestions become the property of IBM. 



Fold 



Fold 



First Class 
Permit 170 
Endicott 
New York 



Business Reply Mail 

No postage stamp necessary if mailed in the U.S.A. 



Postage will be paid by: 

International Business Machines Corporation 

Department G60 

P.O. Box 6 

Endicott, New York 13760 




O 

< 

in 

if) 

r-t- 

o 

—\ 
03 
CQ 
CD 

m 
to 

2+ 

3' 

03 
i-+ 
CD 
to 



in 

CO 

o 

CO 



CD 
Q. 

5" 

c 
'in 

> 



o 
o 

ho 
■Pi 
i 

en 
o 

CO 



Fold 



Fold 



If you would like a reply, please print: 



Your Name. 



Company Name. 



Department 

Street Address. 

Gty 

State 



Zip Code. 



International Business Machines Corporation 

Data Processing Division 

1133 Westchester Avenue, White Plains, New York 10604 

(U.S.A. only) 

IBM World Trade Corporation 

821 United Nations Plaza, New York, New York 10017 

(International) 




Technical Newsletter 



This Newsletter No. GN24-5463 

Date February 1, 1973 

Base Publication No. GC24-5094-1 

System S/370 (OS/VS1 Release 2) 

Previous Newsletters None 



OS/VS1 Storage Estimates 

© IBM Corp. 1972, 1973 



This Technical Newsletter, a part of Release 2 of OS/VSl, provides replacement pages for your 
publication. These replacement pages remain in effect for subsequent OS/VSl releases unless 
specifically altered. Pages to be inserted and/or removed are: 



Cover, 2 
13 and 14 
19 and 20 
21 and 22 



37 and 38 
43 and 44 
49 and 50 
133 and 134 



A change to the text or to an illustration is indicated by a vertical line to the left of the 
change. 



Summary of Amendments 

This Technical Newsletter makes miscellaneous corrections to the base publication. 



Note: Please insert this page in your publication to provide a record of changes. 



IBM Corporation, Programming Publications, Department G60, P.O. Box 6, Endicott, N.Y. 13760 



Printed in U.S.A. 



GC24-5094-1 



International Business Machines Corporation 

Data Processing Division 

1133 Westchester Avenue, White Plains, New York 10604 

(U.S.A. only) 

IBM World Trade Corporation 

821 United Nations Plaza, New York, New York 10017 

(International)